Advertisement
Advertisement
The Vista
Simple,
Powerful,
Visual
Version
2.1
B
Copyright
&
disclaimer
This product is approved for use in Europe and Australia/New Zealand and conforms to the following standards:
•
•
European Norms Australian / New Zealand Standards
•
•
EN60950 AS/NZS60950
Conformance has been achieved for intended usage in environment E1: Residential.
To ensure continued compliance with EMC Directive 89/336 and the Australian Radio communications Act
1992, use only high quality data cables with continuous shield, and connectors with conductive back shells.
Examples of such cables are: DMX: Belden 8102 (100% Aluminium foil screen, 65% Copper braid)
TIP: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not properly installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
•
•
• reorient or relocate the receiving antenna; increase the separation between the equipment and receiver; connect the equipment into an outlet on a different circuit from that to which the receiver is connected;
• consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help.
Disclaimer
Information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor. Jands Pty Limited shall not be liable for any loss or damage whatsoever arising from the use of information or any error contained in this manual. It is recommended that all service and repairs this product be carried out by Jands Pty Limited or its authorised service agents. Jands Pty Limited can accept any liability whatsoever for any loss or damage caused by service, maintena unauthorised personnel, or by use other than that intended by the manufacturer. nce or repair by not on
Jands lighting products must only be used for the purpose they were intended conjunction with the user manual. Disconnect mains power when not in use.
by the manufacturer and in
© Copyright JANDS PTY LIMITED 2004 - 2011 All rights reserved
Manufactured in Australia by:
JANDS Pty Limited ACN 001 187 837 a
Phone: +61-2-9582-0909
MASCOT NSW 1460 Sydney Australia
Fax: +61-2-9582-0999
Web: www.jands.com.au
Contents
Contents
1.
Welcome to the Vista..............................................................2
‐ 1
What’s different about the Vista? ....................................................................... 2 ‐ 1
What things are the same as on other consoles?................................................ 2 ‐ 1
About the generic fixture model.......................................................................... 2 ‐ 2
Need more information? ..................................................................................... 2 ‐ 2
2.
Getting started........................................................................2
‐ 1
Setting up the console ......................................................................................... 2 ‐ 1
Switching on ......................................................................................................... 2 ‐ 2
Creating and loading shows ................................................................................. 2 ‐ 4
3.
Using the interface..................................................................3
‐ 1
Menu bar.............................................................................................................. 3 ‐ 1
Main toolbar......................................................................................................... 3 ‐ 1
The Sidebar........................................................................................................... 3 ‐ 9
Toolbars.............................................................................................................. 3 ‐ 10
4.
Patching your rig .....................................................................4
‐ 1
Adding fixtures to the patch ................................................................................ 4 ‐ 1
Changing universes .............................................................................................. 4 ‐ 4
Re ‐ arranging fixtures on the patch panel ............................................................ 4 ‐ 4
Setting fixture properties..................................................................................... 4 ‐ 5
Viewing the patch in different ways .................................................................... 4 ‐ 8
Controlling the fixtures ...................................................................................... 4 ‐ 10
Cloning fixtures .................................................................................................. 4 ‐ 10
Exporting and importing patch information ...................................................... 4 ‐ 11
Configuring the DMX & Ethernet Outputs ......................................................... 4 ‐ 13
5.
The Chooser window ..............................................................5
‐ 1
The Chooser screen.............................................................................................. 5 ‐ 1
Arranging fixtures in a layout............................................................................... 5 ‐ 2
Using the Programmer Sidebar.......................................................................... 5 ‐ 18
The Palette tab ................................................................................................... 5 ‐ 18
Using the All panel ............................................................................................. 5 ‐ 21
Using the detailed panels................................................................................... 5 ‐ 26
The Components tab.......................................................................................... 5 ‐ 37
Groups ................................................................................................................ 5 ‐ 44
Presets................................................................................................................ 5 ‐ 45
Vista User Guide, Version 2 i
Contents
SmartFX...............................................................................................................5
‐ 49
Extracts ...............................................................................................................5
‐ 50
Using a keypad in the programmer window ......................................................5
‐ 51
The Programmer hardware controls ..................................................................5
‐ 53
6.
Working with cuelists ............................................................. 6 ‐ 1
Store All ................................................................................................................6
‐ 1
Store Part..............................................................................................................6
‐ 6
Opening a Cuelist in the Editor.............................................................................6
‐ 9
The Timeline window .........................................................................................6
‐ 10
Creating a Move in Black cue .............................................................................6
‐ 18
About the timeline..............................................................................................6
‐ 33
Timeline events ..................................................................................................6
‐ 40
Creating and applying extracts...........................................................................6
‐ 47
Extracts ...............................................................................................................6
‐ 47
Using commands within cuelists ........................................................................6
‐ 48
Updating Presets and Cuelists during playback .................................................6
‐ 50
7.
SmartFX.................................................................................. 7 ‐ 1
Effect types ...........................................................................................................7
‐ 1
Using effects .........................................................................................................7
‐ 1
Effect controls.......................................................................................................7
‐ 4
Creating an effect from scratch..........................................................................7
‐ 12
Stopping an effect ..............................................................................................7
‐ 13
8.
Assigning Audio to a Cuelist.................................................... 8 ‐ 1
Using Learn Timing to adjust cue timing ..............................................................8
‐ 2
9.
Automating Playback.............................................................. 9 ‐ 4
Using Timecode to control Cuelists......................................................................9
‐ 4
Using Date and Time to control cuelists...............................................................9
‐ 5
Creating a New Event ...........................................................................................9
‐ 7
10.
The Playback Control Window .............................................. 10 ‐ 9
Controlling and monitoring playback .................................................................10
‐ 9
11.
Using the console hardware ................................................. 11 ‐ 1
Console layout ....................................................................................................11
‐ 1
T4 Console ..........................................................................................................11
‐ 1
T2 Console ..........................................................................................................11
‐ 2
I3 Console ...........................................................................................................11
‐ 2
L5 Console...........................................................................................................11
‐ 2
S3 Control Surface ..............................................................................................11
‐ 2 ii Vista User Guide, Version 2
Contents
S1 Control Surface.............................................................................................. 11 ‐ 2
M1 Control surface ............................................................................................ 11 ‐ 3
Grand Master and DBO ...................................................................................... 11 ‐ 3
Function keys ..................................................................................................... 11 ‐ 3
The modifier keys............................................................................................... 11 ‐ 4
The Super Playback / Programmer controls ...................................................... 11 ‐ 4
Playbacks with faders....................................................................................... 11 ‐ 11
Playbacks without faders ................................................................................. 11 ‐ 12
Page controls.................................................................................................... 11 ‐ 12
Configuring the console for Playback .............................................................. 11 ‐ 13
Playback status indication................................................................................ 11 ‐ 17
Playback popup menu...................................................................................... 11 ‐ 18
Setting cuelist properties ................................................................................. 11 ‐ 19
Group Masters ................................................................................................. 11 ‐ 19
Pages ................................................................................................................ 11 ‐ 21
Snapshots ......................................................................................................... 11 ‐ 22
12.
The Output window ..............................................................12
‐ 1
Configuring the Output window ........................................................................ 12 ‐ 2
13.
The Console control panel.....................................................13
‐ 1
System settings (T & I series only) ..................................................................... 13 ‐ 1
Calibrating the Pen tablet .................................................................................. 13 ‐ 1
Display and Input Devices .................................................................................. 13 ‐ 2
Using the screensaver ........................................................................................ 13 ‐ 3
Network preferences ......................................................................................... 13 ‐ 4
Date and time..................................................................................................... 13 ‐ 5
14.
Appendix 1 – menu & toolbar reference ...............................14
‐ 6
Menus................................................................................................................. 14 ‐ 6
15.
Appendix 2 – installing new software.................................. 15 ‐ 18
Installation (T2, T4, I3 & L5 Consoles).............................................................. 15 ‐ 18
Installation (Windows XP, Vista & 7)................................................................ 15 ‐ 20
Connecting to the console via FTP ................................................................... 15 ‐ 20
16.
Appendix 3 – creating a bootable USB device...................... 16 ‐ 22
17.
Appendix 4 – tracking backup ............................................. 17 ‐ 25
Setting up ......................................................................................................... 17 ‐ 25
Starting Tracking Backup.................................................................................. 17 ‐ 27
What happens if the Master fails..................................................................... 17 ‐ 28
Backup status ................................................................................................... 17 ‐ 29
Vista User Guide, Version 2 iii
Contents
Troubleshooting ...............................................................................................17
‐ 30
Private IP addresses..........................................................................................17
‐ 30
18.
Appendix 5 – using VNC on T & I ‐ series consoles................ 18 ‐ 31
VNC password...................................................................................................18
‐ 31
Starting VNC......................................................................................................18
‐ 31
Connecting to Vista using a Windows PC .........................................................18
‐ 31
Connecting to Vista using a Mac ......................................................................18
‐ 32
19.
Appendix 6, Using midi show control (MSC) to control cues 19 ‐ 34
Configuring the midi port .................................................................................19
‐ 34
MSC lighting messages .....................................................................................19
‐ 35
20.
Appendix 7, Using serial communication to control cuelists 20 ‐ 38
Connecting to the serial port............................................................................20
‐ 38
Enabling the serial port ....................................................................................20
‐ 38
Playback commands .........................................................................................20
‐ 39
Setting fixture levels .........................................................................................20
‐ 39
21.
Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor.......................................... 21 ‐ 41
The Fixture Type Library Editor ........................................................................21
‐ 41
Creating a Fixture Profile..................................................................................21
‐ 42
Main tab: ..........................................................................................................21
‐ 43
DMX Chart tab: .................................................................................................21
‐ 45
Channels with Custom Ranges .........................................................................21
‐ 66
22.
Appendix 9 – Crash Logs ..................................................... 22 ‐ 68
Retrieving Software Crash Files from a Console ..............................................22
‐ 68
23.
Appendix 10 – the touchpad and the pen tablet ................. 23 ‐ 73
Using the touchpad ..........................................................................................23
‐ 73
Working with the grip pen................................................................................23
‐ 74
Tip switch / Pen Tip ..........................................................................................23
‐ 74
Using a pen .......................................................................................................23
‐ 75
Removing and installing the Duo Switch..........................................................23
‐ 78
Precautions on using and handling the Pen ‐ Tablet..........................................23
‐ 80
24.
Appendix 11 – technical details .......................................... 24 ‐ 82
Power................................................................................................................24
‐ 82
Service & Maintenance.....................................................................................24
‐ 82
Battery replacement.........................................................................................24
‐ 82
Installation ........................................................................................................24
‐ 83
T4 / T2 / I3 / L5 Shut down ...............................................................................24
‐ 83 iv Vista User Guide, Version 2
Contents
General Specifications...................................................................................... 24 ‐ 83
25.
Index.....................................................................................25
‐ 1
Vista User Guide, Version 2 v
What’s different about the Vista?
Welcome to the Vista
1.
Welcome
to
the
Vista
Welcome to the User Guide for the Jands Vista lighting console. This guide is intended to give you the information you need to get your Vista up and running as quickly as possible.
Note that this guide will be regularly updated as enhancements are made to the
Vista. A current version of the manual is available at www.jandsvista.com.
What’s
different
about
the
Vista?
You’ll have noticed that the Vista is a bit different to most other consoles you’ve used. Instead of a keypad, it uses a pen; instead of relying on you entering hundreds of key combinations, the Vista lets you do everything visually; instead of representing your show as numbers, the Vista represents it as events happening over time.
If you’ve seen any of the digital editing software packages for sound and video that are available these days, the most different aspect of the Vista, the timeline, will be instantly familiar to you. If not, don’t worry, once you start using it you’ll pick it up very quickly.
The Vista is different, but that’s what makes it so much easier to use. Once you’ve read this guide you’ll have enough of an idea of how this console works to create your first lightshow.
What
things
are
the
same
as
on
other
consoles?
Apart from the pen and the timeline concept, the Vista contains all the basic elements of live lighting that you’re familiar with. You’ll find controls for intensity, colour, beam, gobos and so on; you’ll find libraries of all the manufacturers’ most popular fixtures to choose from; you’ll find a console that has the usual faders, buttons and LCD displays.
So don’t worry, the Vista has a lot in common with other consoles – we’ve taken all the best elements of existing consoles and added a whole new dimension to them. You’ll soon be right at home with the Vista.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 2 ‐ 1
About the generic fixture model Welcome to the Vista
About
the
generic
fixture
model
One thing about the Vista that’s not immediately obvious is the ‘generic fixture model’. What is it? It’s a part of the software that works in the background and enables all fixtures, no matter what type or manufacturer to be treated the same way.
Let’s say you’ve programmed a show using one brand of fixture but need to replace some of them with a different kind. Normally this would be a major hassle because you’d have to find a similar fixture then re-program each and every cue.
With the Vista, you can replace a fixture and you don’t have to do any reprogramming. Why? Because everything you’ve programmed is stored in generic form rather than as specific DMX channel values. For instance if you’ve programmed the lights to be Red, the Vista can send that information to any light and achieve the same colour.
Sure, if you replace a fixture that has colour mixing with a fixture that has a fixed colour wheel, you won’t expect to get the exact same result, but even in this case, the Vista will adapt and provide as near a match as the replacement fixture is capable of.
Need
more
information?
If you have questions about the Vista or you’d like more information, go to our website at www.jandsvista.com
, or call us on +61-2-9582-0909.
2 ‐ 2 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Setting up the console
Getting started
2.
Getting
started
Setting
up
the
console
Power
Connect the Vista T, I or S series console to any mains supply between 100 and
240vAC. The Vista M series obtains power via the USB port
External
displays
You can attach two external displays, including touch screen monitors to the
Vista T series consoles using standard VGA connectors.
Vista I series consoles have connections for one DVI and one VGA monitor. A
DVI – VGA cable can be used if you prefer to use two VGA monitors.
Vista L series consoles have connections for one DVI / HDMI and one DVI /
VGA monitor.
Â
Vista has been tested with Wacom pen tablet LCDs and ELO ‘Intellitouch and Accutouch’ monitors. ELO makes many different touch screen monitors and not all models may be compatible. Please check for compatibility before purchasing touch screen monitors for use with your Vista console.
For Vista M and S series control surfaces, monitor configuration will depend on the configuration of the computer you are using.
Desk
Lights
You can attach two Littlelite or equivalent desklights to the Vista L and T series console and one to the I and S series consoles.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 2 ‐ 1
Switching on Getting started
Switching
on
When you switch the console power on or launch the application on your PC,
Vista starts up and displays the opening splash screen:
Once it finishes loading the program, Vista displays the Patch screen. If this is the first time you’ve opened Vista V2 or you are starting a new show the patch table will be empty.:
2 ‐ 2 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Getting started Switching on
This is the Patch window, waiting for you to start creating a new show. To see the other Vista windows you use the buttons on the toolbar at the top left of the screen:
This button… does this… displays the Patch window displays the Console hardware simulation window displays the Programmer Fixtures window displays the Programmer Timeline view. displays the Playback control window displays the fixture Output window
Vista User Guide, Version 2 2 ‐ 3
Creating and loading shows Getting started
Creating
and
loading
shows
Creating
a
show
To create a new show at any time, choose the New Show option from the File menu.
Loading
existing
shows
To load a show you’ve already created, choose the Open Show option from the
File menu. Vista displays the Open Show window:
To load a show archive you’ve previously saved (or transferred to the console using the export / import function), find the directory containing it, then click on the filename to select it and hit the Open button to load it.
Saving
shows
To save a show at any time, choose the Save Show option from the File menu. As with any computer, it’s a good idea to save regularly in case of power failure.
2 ‐ 4 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Getting started Creating and loading shows
The first time you save a new show, Vista displays the Save As window:
Type a name for the file and then click the Save button. Vista automatically creates a show folder, with the same name and puts the show file inside it. Once you’ve named the file, each time you choose the Save option from then on, Vista overwrites that file with the new details without displaying this window.
Saving
copies
of
shows
To save a separate version of a show with a different name, choose the Save
Show As… option from the File menu. You can then give the file another name and save it in a separate show folder.
Importing
show
archives
You can also open shows you’ve created on a PC or another console onto the
Vista. The shows must be on a CD or any kind of storage device that connects to the Universal Serial Bus (USB) port (such as a memory stick).
To open a show, attach the USB device or put the CD in the CD drive (if available) and choose the Import > Show… option from the File menu.
Exporting
show
archives
(backing
up)
It’s extremely important to make backup copies of your show user data folders.
Like any other computer, the Vista stores your shows on a hard drive, and although it’s extremely unlikely, if this drive were to fail (e.g. if the console was dropped) you could lose all the show files stored on it.
For this reason we recommend that you make regular backups of your work, onto a storage device that you can connect via a USB port.
To export a show archive onto an external storage device:
1.
Connect a USB Flash drive or external disk to the USB port.
2.
Choose the Export option from the File menu. Vista displays the Export window:
Vista User Guide, Version 2 2 ‐ 5
Creating and loading shows Getting started
3.
Click on the Show button and then select the show to backup from the list of show files.
4.
Click the Next button. Vista displays the Export window:
5.
Click the Browse button and choose a drive and directory on the computer or storage device and hit the Export button.
6.
Click the Finish button to close the Export window.
Deleting
shows
To delete a show, choose the Open show option from the File menu, then rightclick on the show folder name and choose ‘Delete’ from the popup menu.
Password
‐
protecting
your
console
or
show
You can lock your console or show file or disable editing, with a password. To do this:
1.
Choose the Lock option from the File menu. Vista displays a popup menu with three options:
2 ‐ 6 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Getting started Creating and loading shows
This option… does this…
Lock entire console the password is required to use any console functions or controls.
Disable all editing the password is required to edit cuelists, groups, presets and all other show components
Lock current show the password is required to save changes to the show file
2.
Select an option from the popup menu. Vista displays the Password window:
3.
Enter your password in both boxes and click ‘OK’
Your show or console is now password protected.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 2 ‐ 7
Menu bar
Using the interface
3.
Using
the
interface
The latest version of Vista features a new simpler layout. No matter whether you have worked with Vista before or are seeing it for the first time it’s worth taking some time to get familiar with the new window layout and options.
Menu
bar
At the top of the window you’ll see the main menu bar. Click on any menu heading to access Vista’s dialog boxes, submenus and commands.
The main menu bar also shows:
• the show file name - if Autosave is turned on you’ll see
‘[A]’ after the show name
• the Grand Master level setting
• the time.
Main
toolbar
At the top of the window you’ll see the main toolbar which is common to ALL windows. This toolbar contain the most frequently used buttons and is divided into three sections. The centre section contains 12 buttons that map to the
Function buttons on Vista consoles and the ‘F’ keys on your keyboard you can be customized to suit your style of operation.
Window
navigation
You switch between the main windows using the 6 buttons on the top left side of the main toolbar. You can also switch between windows by selecting the Patch,
Console, Fixture Chooser, Timeline, Playback or Output option from the View menu.
Â
Hovering over the icons shows the button name.
This button… does this…
(Alt + 1) displays the Patch window
(Alt + 2) displays the Console hardware simulation window
Vista User Guide, Version 2 3 ‐ 1
Main toolbar Using the interface
This button… does this…
(Alt + 3) displays the Programmer Fixtures window
(Alt + 4) displays the Programmer Timeline view.
(Alt + 5) displays the Playback control window
(Alt + 6) displays the fixture Output window
V1
classic
style
window
navigation
If you prefer to select windows from the bottom of the screen you can open a toolbar that emulates the earlier versions of Vista. To do this select the ‘Vista
Toolbar’ option from the View menu.
Vista places the toolbar at the bottom of the window:
Click on the buttons to select the Patch, Console, Fixture Chooser, Timeline,
Playback or Output window.
The
Soft
buttons
The twelve buttons in the centre of the main toolbar provide quick access to frequently used commands, functions and windows.
• If you are using a T series console these buttons are automatically mapped to the function buttons, above the
LCD / tablet.
• If you are using an I or S series unit the first 6 (5 on the S3) buttons are automatically mapped to the function buttons in the top centre section of the control surface.
• For all Vista systems you can use your keyboard F1-F12 buttons to activate these buttons.
Â
You can display text labels, for the function buttons, at the top of your tablet or monitor. To do this select the ‘Softkey Toolbar’ option from the View menu.
3 ‐ 2 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Using the interface Main toolbar
Standard
buttons
When you first start a new show Vista loads the standard set of buttons but you can customize each and every button, as described below.
This button… does this…
Saves the show file to disk
Opens a new Cuelist in the Editor
Opens an existing Cuelist in the Editor
HiLite
Turns on the Editor’s ‘Highlight’ mode. When you are focusing or testing your fixtures you can use Highlight to bring up the intensity of each fixture automatically when you select it in the
Fixture Chooser.
Store Part
Store All
Clear displays the Store Part window where you can save the contents of the editor to any cue in any cuelist. Store part provides many options and must be used for tracking to operate correctly. See Store Part on page xxx displays the Store Look window where you can save the complete output (the look on stage). Storing this way will ensure that when you play a Cue back it will appear exactly as it did when you saved it
Clear all information coming from the Live tab.
If a Cuelist tab is selected this button closes that tab.
Update displays the Update window where information coming from the Editor (the Live tab or any Cuelist tab) can be used to update one or more Cues and Presets.
Blind
Turns the output from the editor off. In this mode you can still edit cues but there will be no output sent from the editor to your fixtures.
Live displays the Live time window where you can set a fade time that applies to any selections you make from the editor palettes or presets.
FX displays the SmartFX window where you can create and edit effects . See SmartFX on page 7-1
Vista User Guide, Version 2 3 ‐ 3
Main toolbar Using the interface
This button… does this…
Release All
Clicking this button releases all the fixtures from their current settings as determined by the cuelists that are running and returns them to their default state.
Modified
soft
buttons
The soft buttons provide different functions when you press the Red (Shift),
Green (Alt), Yellow (Control) or Blue (Control+Alt) modifier.
Shift
set
(Red
modifier)
Hold down the Red modifier button or the Shift button, on your keyboard, to access and display the Shift set.
This button… does this…
Next Fixture
Used to step through fixtures, selects the 1 st fixture (or the one after the current selection) and de-selects the others. Each subsequent press selects the next fixture. Useful when focusing fixtures.
Previous
Fixture
Used to step through fixtures, selects the last fixture (or the one before the current selection) and de-selects the others. Each subsequent press selects the previous fixture. Useful when focusing fixtures.
Inverts the fixture selection (i.e. all selected fixtures are deselected and all de-selected fixtures are selected).
Invert
Selects all the active fixtures (i.e. those that have Intensity).
Active
Select all the fixtures that are programmed in the current cue.
Programmed
Selects every fixture.
All
3 ‐ 4 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Using the interface Main toolbar
This button… does this…
De-selects all fixtures
De-select all
Vista remembers the last set of fixtures you selected; you use this button to toggle back to your previous fixture selection.
Previous selection
Next selection
If you have used the previous selection command this button will toggle back to the fixture selection you had before pressing previous selection.
Ignites the lamps in the selected fixtures
Strike
Switches off the lamps in the selected fixtures off.
Douse
Reset
Resets the selected fixtures to their factory default settings. This is useful if a fixture has a control problem and you need to get it
‘back to normal’.
Alt
set
(Green
Modifier)
Hold down the Green modifier button or the Alt (Option) button, on your keyboard, to access and display the Atlt (Option) set.
This button… does this…
Opens a new Cuelist in the Editor
Open Cuelist
Opens an existing Cuelist in the Editor
New cuelist
Vista User Guide, Version 2 3 ‐ 5
Main toolbar Using the interface
This button… does this…
Adds a new cue at the end of the cuelist being edited
Append cue
Inserts a new cue, before the cue that is being edited
Insert before
Adds a new cue after the cue that is being edited.
Insert after
Deletes the selected cue
Delete Cue
Displays the Create Preset window
New Preset
Displays the Create Extract window
New Extract
Displays the Create Snapshot window
New Snapshot
Displays the Create Fixture Group window
New Group
Updates the selected group to include any additional fixtures that have been selected.
Update Group
Creates a new fixture matrix container in the Fixture Chooser window
New Matrix
3 ‐ 6 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Using the interface Main toolbar
Ctrl
set
(Yellow
Modifier)
Hold down the Yellow modifier button or the Control button, on your keyboard, to access and display the Control set.
This button… does this…
Live properties Opens a Live tab properties window.
Cuelist properties
Opens the Cuelist properties window.
Insert
Command
Convert to release events
Merge Cues
Opens the Insert Command window where you can add a command to the cue you are editing (i.e. to play another cue)
Sets the selected events to release the feature.
Show tracked events
Merges the events in2 or more selected cues into a single cue.
Select the cues in the Cue navigator bar.
Shows or hides tracked events in the time line. Tracked events are shown in a lighter, transparent colour and cannot be selected.
Clear Fixtures Clears all features from the selected fixtures so that they return to their previous state.
Home Fixtures Sends the selected fixtures to their Home settings
Block cue Blocking copies any tracked events into the selected cue and prevents any future changes, to earlier cues from tracking through. This means that no matter what changes are made to other cues in the list, the cue will play back the exact look it had at the time it was blocked.
See Blocking a cue on page 6-18
Super - Block cue
Un-Block cue
If you ‘Super Block’ a cue, when it runs any features, for the fixtures in the cue, that aren’t included in the cue are automatically sent to their home value. This means that the cue will look as it would if no other cuelist was playing.
Removes redundant events, from the selected cue. This means that if the selected cue includes an event that is the exactly the same as an event that is tracking through from a previous cue, that event will be removed. Unblocking will not change the cue’s look.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 3 ‐ 7
Main toolbar Using the interface
This button… does this…
Move in Black Opens the Move in Black window where you can Mark a cue and add MIB events that pre-set the selected fixtures so that when they turn on you don’t see them moving, changing colour etc.
Ctrl
+
Alt
set
(Blue
Modifier)
Hold down the Blue modifier button or the Control & Alt buttons, on your keyboard, to access and display the Control-Alt set.
This button… does this…
Show selection order
Shows selection order numbers on the fixture icons.
Shows timeline events for tracked fetures. Show Tracked
Events
Cue Only
Editing
Not used
Not used
Set Event
Timing
Opens the event timing window.
Align Start
Align End
Not used
Not used
Stop FX
Not used
Aligns the start position of the selected events.
Aligns the end position of the selected events.
Stops all running effects.
3 ‐ 8 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Using the interface The Sidebar
Configuring
the
soft
buttons
To change the function of a soft button, right click on the button and choose a command or function from the popup menu. Any command from any menu can be assigned to the soft button. To change one of the alternate sets hold the Shift,
Alt or Ctrl key while right clicking.
Soft
key
toolbar
The soft buttons correspond to the hardware buttons above the main screen on L and T series consoles. To make it easier to identify the buttons you can add onscreen labels below the buttons. To do this select the ‘Softkey Toolbar’ option from the View menu.
Vista places the softkey labels toolbar at the top of the window:
The
Sidebar
To show or hide the sidebar click on the ‘Sidebar’ button at the top right side of the main menu bar:
The sidebar provides access to different features, depending on the window you have open:
• In the Patch window you use the sidebar to select fixtures from the library, and configure them.
• In the Console window you use the sidebar to select components (i.e. Cuelists, Groups, Presets and more) and assign them to the Playback sets. You can also assign fader and button functions to the playback controls.
• In the Fixture Chooser and Timeline the sidebar contains the palettes (i.e. Intensity, Position, Colour, Gobo, Beam) and component panels (i.e. Groups, Presets, Extracts,
Effects and more)
• There is no sidebar in the Playback Control and Output windows.
Configuring
the
sidebar
If you prefer the Sidebar can be moved to the left side of all windows. To do this select the Sidebar, ‘Dock Left’ option from the View menu.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 3 ‐ 9
Toolbars Using the interface
You can adjust the width of the sidebar by clicking on the window divider and dragging to the left or right.
Toolbars
Most windows have optional toolbars that provide buttons for sets of menu commands. To show or hide any of the optional toolbars select the ‘Toolbars’ option from the view menu.
Patch
window
toolbars
There are three toolbars available on the Patch window
View
toolbar
To open or close a toolbar select the ‘Toolbars’ option from the View menu:
This button… does this…
Table view Switches the main panel of the Patch window to the standard
Table view.
List view
DMX view
Switches the main panel of the Patch window to the List view where the patched fixtures are shown as a list.
Switches the main panel of the Patch window to the DMX view where the output of each channel of each fixtures is shown, on the patch table.
Fixture
Macro
toolbar
(also
available
on
the
Chooser
&
Timeline
window
To open or close a toolbar select the ‘Toolbars’ option from the View menu:
3 ‐ 10 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Using the interface
This button…
Strike
Douse
Reset
Toolbars does this…
Ignites the lamps in the selected fixtures.
Switches off the lamps in the selected fixtures off.
Resets the selected fixtures to their factory default settings.
This is useful if a fixture has a control problem and you need to get it ‘back to normal’.
Connections
toolbar
To open or close a toolbar select the ‘Toolbars’ option from the View menu:
This button… does this…
Connect Open the DMX Connections window where you can connect your console’s DMX outputs and any external Ethernet-DMX interface boxes to the patch universes.
Chooser
&
Timeline
window
toolbars
There are nine toolbars available on the Editor windows
Update
toolbar
All the buttons, on this toolbar, are available on the standard soft button set.
However if you have re-configured the soft buttons this toolbar may be useful:
This button… does this…
Opens a new Cuelist in the Editor
Opens an existing Cuelist in the Editor
Store Part displays the Store Part window where you can save the contents of the editor to any cue in any cuelist. Store part provides many options and must be used for tracking to operate correctly. See Store Part on page xxx
Vista User Guide, Version 2 3 ‐ 11
Toolbars Using the interface
This button… does this…
Store Look displays the Store Look window where you can save the complete output (the look on stage). Storing this way will ensure that when you play a Cue back it will appear exactly as it did when you saved it
Clear all information coming from the Live tab.
If a Cuelist tab is selected this button closes that tab.
Clear
Update displays the Update window where information coming from the Editor (the Live tab or any Cuelist tab) can be used to update one or more Cues and Presets.
Blind
Turns the output from the editor off. In this mode you can still edit cues but there will be no output sent from the editor to your fixtures.
Live displays the Live time window where you can set a fade time that applies to any selections you make from the editor palettes or presets.
Edit
toolbar
To open or close a toolbar select the ‘Toolbars’ option from the View menu:
This icon…
Ctrl X
Ctrl C
Ctrl V does this…
Cuts the selected item.
Copies the selected item
Pastes the selected item.
Undo
toolbar
To open or close a toolbar select the ‘Toolbars’ option from the View menu:
This icon… does this…
3 ‐ 12 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Using the interface
This icon…
Ctrl+Z
Ctrl+Y does this…
Undo the last action
Redo the last action
Toolbars
Fixture
selection
toolbar
To open or close a toolbar select the ‘Toolbars’ option from the View menu:
This icon…
Previous selection
Next selection
Previous Fixture
Next Fixture
De-select all
Invert
All
Active does this…
Vista remembers the last set of fixtures you selected; you use this button to toggle back to your previous fixture selection.
If you have used the previous selection command this button will toggle back to the fixture selection you had before pressing previous selection.
Used to step through fixtures, selects the last fixture (or the one before the current selection) and de-selects the others. Each subsequent press selects the previous fixture. Useful when focusing fixtures.
Used to step through fixtures, selects the 1 st fixture (or the one after the current selection) and de-selects the others. Each subsequent press selects the next fixture.
Useful when focusing fixtures.
De-selects all fixtures
Inverts the fixture selection (i.e. all selected fixtures are de-selected and all de-selected fixtures are selected).
Selects every fixture.
Selects all the active fixtures (i.e. those that have
Intensity).
Vista User Guide, Version 2 3 ‐ 13
Toolbars Using the interface
This icon…
Programmed does this…
Select all the fixtures that are programmed in the current cue.
Command
Line
toolbar
See Using a keypad in the programmer windowon Page 5-51
Fan
toolbar
The fan toolbar is used to set how Feature values and Event times are spread.
This option…
Linear Fan
Diverged from centre. does this…
Fanned values radiate in both positive and negative directions from the base value, starting from the centre of the fixture selection
Fan from end
Linear from Start
The fanned feature values radiate in one direction from the base value, starting from the first selected fixture.
Fan from start
Linear from End
The fanned feature values radiate in one direction from the base value, starting from the last selected fixture.
Fan from centre.
Linear from Extremities
The fanned feature values radiate in one direction from the base value, starting from the first and last selected fixtures.
Inverted fan
Diverged from extremities
The fanned values radiate in both positive and negative directions from the base value, starting from the first and last selected fixture.
Fan from both ends
Linear from Centre
The fanned feature values radiate in one direction from the base value, starting from the centre of the fixture selection.
Â
To fan a feature or events, select the fan mode and hold the Yellow modifier or Control key while setting the feature value or dragging the event bars.
3 ‐ 14 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Using the interface Toolbars
Components
toolbar
The components toolbar includes buttons to create new Presets, Groups and
Extracts
This option…
Preset
Group
Extract does this…
Opens the create New Preset window.
Opens the create New Group window.
Opens the create New Extract window.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 3 ‐ 15
Adding fixtures to the patch
Patching your rig
4.
Patching
your
rig
Once you’ve got your Vista system connected and powered up you can patch your fixtures the way you want them using the Patch window.
If it’s not already open click on the Patch icon or select the ‘Patch’ option from the
Window menu, Vista displays the Patch screen:
This is where you set up all the fixtures in your rig. You tell the Vista which DMX channels each fixture is assigned to, and in which universe, and can set a range of parameters to customise how each fixture operates.
Adding
fixtures
to
the
patch
The Fixture Type box in the sidebar gives you a few ways to add fixtures to the patch. You can:
• choose a fixture from the ‘Factory’ folder, which lists the most up to date fixtures in the Vista library by manufacturer and then in alphabetical order.
• choose a fixture from the ‘User’ list, which includes all fixtures that you have created.
• choose a fixture by first typing in the ‘Search’ box to filter the list down to just those fixtures that match what you’ve typed.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 4 ‐ 1
Adding fixtures to the patch Patching your rig
Choosing
a
fixture
from
the
Factory
list
To add a fixture from the Factory list:
1.
Click the ‘+’ symbol beside ‘Factory’ in the Fixture Type box. Vista displays a list of manufacturer’s folders.
2.
Click the ‘+’ symbol beside the name of the manufacturer you want, to display the list of fixtures in that folder.
3.
Scroll down the list until you find the fixture you want.
Adding
the
fixture
to
the
patch
panel
Once you’ve selected the fixture you want, there are two ways to add it to the patch panel:
• you can drag and drop one or more fixtures onto a specific
DMX location on the panel, or
• you can use the Patch tab to place multiple copes of the fixture onto the patch panel.
Dragging
and
dropping
individual
fixtures
To patch fixtures this way, just click on the name of the fixture in the Fixture type box, type a number in the ‘Quantity’ box and drag the fixture(s) over to the spot on the patch panel where you want it.
When you ‘drop’ the fixture, Vista fills the required number of DMX channels with that fixture’s details. This example shows 8 Vari*lite VL2500 spot fixtures that use 22 DMX channels each, dropped onto channel 1:
Once you’ve dropped a fixture onto the patch panel you can move it around to any channel by clicking on it and dragging it to a new location.
Vista represents the fixture as a solid coloured bar with an ID number before the name. The bar covers as many DMX channels as the fixture needs, and some fixtures will take up more channels than others.
A solid colour shows that this fixture is currently selected. If you click anywhere else in the patch panel, Vista de-selects the fixture and makes the colour transparent to show that it’s no longer selected.
4 ‐ 2 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Patching your rig Adding fixtures to the patch
In our example above the selected fixture is called ‘2 VL2500Sp’. This title consists of two components:
• a unique ID number [2], that Vista assigns automatically.
This number identifies the fixture uniquely within the whole system, across all the universes (i.e. no two fixtures will ever have the same unique ID number).
• a name ( VL2500Sp) ), which you can change if you want in the Name field on the Properties tab.
Patching
multiple
fixtures
with
the
Patch
box
If you prefer using the keyboard to patch your fixtures you can use the Patch tab in the sidebar.
You use this feature to add multiple instances of a fixture at once. To do this:
1.
Select the fixture you want from the ‘Factory’ or ‘User’ lists in the Fixture
Type box.
2.
In the Quantity field, enter how many of this type of fixture you want to add.
3.
If not already selected, click the Patch tab to display the Patch box:
4.
If you want to give the fixture a different name, type it in the Name field.
5.
If you want to assign a specific set of unique ID numbers to this group of fixtures, click in the Fixture Number from field and set the unique ID number (e.g. <44> ) you want for the first fixture in the group. If you don’t set this, Vista assigns the next valid number.
6.
Type a number in the ‘Multi Patch’ box if you want multiple copies to be patched as one fixture. Use this option, for example, when patching multiple dimmers as a single fixture.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 4 ‐ 3
Changing universes Patching your rig
7.
In the DMX Universe field, Vista automatically displays the number of the currently selected universe. If you want to add these fixtures to another universe, enter the universe number.
8.
In the DMX address field, set the number of the DMX channel where you want this group of fixtures to start. If you’ve already added any fixtures to this universe, Vista displays the next channel number in sequence.
9.
If you prefer, you can patch fixtures to an ‘absolute address’ For example typing 513 in the Absolute address field, automatically sets the Universe to 2 and the DMX number to 1. If you’ve already added any fixtures to this universe, Vista displays the next channel number in sequence.
10.
In the Spacing field, Vista displays the number of channels each instance of the fixture you’ve selected will take up. If you want to leave empty channels between each fixture you can increase this number. For example, if a fixture normally uses twelve channels and you increase this number to 14, Vista leaves a gap of two channels between each fixture in the group.
11.
When you’ve set all the fields the way you want them, click the Patch button.
Vista adds the group of fixtures to the patch panel.
Â
If you’ve already added a bunch of fixtures between say, channel 10 and channel 50, and you add another batch starting at channel 1, Vista fits as many of them as it can into channels 1 to 9, then ‘flows’ the rest over to channel 51.
Â
After you type in the search box you can use the ‘Down Arrow’ button your keyboard to move the cursor into the list of f ixtures and then tab
on through the Quantity and other fields.
Changing
universes
Each universe can only handle a certain number of fixtures, depending on the number of DMX channels each fixture needs. To add fixtures to another universe , click another Un
DMX channels. iverse tab at the top of the patch panel to display the next set of
Re
‐
arranging
fixtures
on
the
patch
panel
Moving
fixtures
around
the
patch
panel
Once you’ve added fixtures to the panel you can re-arrange them however you want. Just select the fixtures you want and drag them to a new channel; whe you drop them on the screen, Vista re-arranges them all from that channel. n
4 ‐ 4 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Patching your rig Setting fixture properties
Note that you can’t place them in such a way that any of the channels will ‘fall off’ the end of the universe.
Renaming
fixtures
To rename one or more fixtures select them in the universe panel and choose the
Properties tab in the sidebar:
Enter the name you want to give the selected fixtures in the ‘Name’ field and hit
Enter. Vista renames all the fixtures you had selected.
Renumbering
fixtures
To change the unique system-wide ID number (e.g. <12> ) of a fixture (it is not possible to renumber more than one fixture at a time):
1.
Select the fixture in the universe panel.
2.
Choose the Properties tab in the sidebar.
3.
In the ID field, enter the new ID number and hit Enter on your keyboard.
Deleting
fixtures
You can delete fixtures from the patch panel at any time To do this:
1.
Select the fixture in the universe panel.
2.
Select the ‘Delete fixtures’ option from the Patch menu or right click on the fixture(s) you want to delete and select ‘delete’ from the popup menu.
Setting
fixture
properties
Once you’ve added the fixtures to the patch panel and placed them where you want them, you can set a number of properties for each fixture using the
Properties and Transforms tabs in the sidebar.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 4 ‐ 5
Setting fixture properties Patching your rig
To view and set the properties for one or more fixtures, use the pen to select the fixtures you want on the patch panel. Vista displays the details of those fixtures in the Properties and Transforms tabs:
Â
If you select multiple types of fixture, Vista displays the details of the first type you selected. If the Patch box is currently displayed, press the
Properties tab to display the Properties box.
Properties
tab
Name The name you entered or Vista assigned to this fixture when you dropped it onto to the patch panel. You can edit this here if you want to.
ID
Type
Notes
The unique system-wide ID number assigned to this fixture when you dropped it onto the patch panel. You can change this number here if you want to, but note that Vista won’t allow you to use a number that’s already assigned to another fixture.
This field is not editable. To change the type of fixture without having to remove it click on the ‘Change Fixture Type’ button
(see Swapping a fixture type ).
This field is used to display notes about the fixture. You can add whatever you like in this field.
Transforms
tab
Preheat A percentage value that sets the voltage the fixture lamp will sit at until you switch it on. This is useful for lamps such as Par 64s that take time to switch on from a cold start.
Limit A percentage value that determines the maximum intensity the fixture will ever reach. This is useful if you want to prolong
4 ‐ 6 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Patching your rig Setting fixture properties
Dimmer
Curve
Preview in
Chooser
Invert pan
Invert tilt
Swap pan/tilt
Preview lamp life or prevent fixtures from ever reaching full intensity.
This popup lets you select a dimmer fade curve. The default option is Linear but you can select one of the available opti
Linear, Damp, Snap Start, Snap end, Square Law, I
Square, Switch, Hot power, Flourescent and Sinus nverse ons;
Check this box if you’d like the fixture icons, in the chooser, to display the effects of the Intensity transforms.
Selecting this checkbox reverses the sweep of the pan for th fixture. This is useful when you’re coordinating th e sweep is directions of fixtures hung in different directions.
Selecting this checkbox reverses the sweep of the tilt for this fixture. This is useful when you’re coordinating th directions of fixtures hung in different directions. e sweep
Selecting this checkbox swaps the pan and tilt controls, so the fixture will pan when given a tilt command and vice-versa. Th is useful for coordinating vertical trusses or pipes.
the movements of fixtures hung on is
Check this box if you’d like the fixture icons, in display the effects of the Position transforms.
the chooser, to
Advanced
transforms
The advanced button provides access to more Fixture ‘Transformers’ that allow you to further customize fixtures. For example the Pan and Tilt Offset parameters allow you to correct the home position for fixtures that are hung at an angle.
To add a transform click the Advanced button to op en the transform window then click the Add button to choose a transformer.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 4 ‐ 7
Viewing the patch in different ways Patching your rig
S a
O ome of the tran bove. To choose ffset. sformers a
one of th re also availa e advanced tr ble from the Properties tab as described ansformers click on Pan offset or Tilt
This option…
Minimum
Maximum
Offset
Value Curve does this…
Sets the minimum (percentage) value for this f
For example setting a value of -25 on Pan means th fixtures will only pan left ¾ of their normal ran eature. ge e
Sets the maximum (percentage) value for this feature. For example setting a value of -25 on Pan means the fixtures will only pan left ¾ of their normal r ange
Sets the offset angle. For example setting a Pan offset of 45 would move the fixtures Home position degrees by 45
This popup lets you select a fad e curve. The default option is Linear but you can select one of the a vailable options; Linear, Damp, Snap Start, Snap e p nd, Square Law, Inverse Square, Switch, Hot ower, Flourescent and Sinus
Invert
Preview in Chooser Check this option to see the effect of the transform shown on the fixture chooser icons.
Channels
tab
This is a list of the features and channel numbers of the fixture and which DMX channel is controlling each feature.
Viewing
the
patch
in
different
ways
Vista gives you three different views of your patch so you can get differe of information about the patch. To change the view, select th nt types e table, List or DMX option from the View menu or click one of the thr the toolbar. ee corresponding buttons: in
4 ‐ 8 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Patching your rig Viewing the patch in different ways
Table
view
The Patch screen defaults to the Table view, as shown earlier in this section. This is the view you will use most of the time: here you can drag and drop fixtures into the patch panel for each universe and arrange them the way you want them.
List
view
If you choose the List option Vista displays the fixtures as a list with columns for the fixture:
You can choose the columns you want to show or hide by right-clicking in the header row and choosing the fields you want from the popup menu. You can also re-arrange the columns by clicking on the column name and dragging it to the left or right. The default column arrangement is:
Fixture Label (as shown in the chooser window),
ID number
Name
Fixture type
Patch part – for fixtures which re patched in 2 or more parts. For example some fixtures have a Intensity (Dimmer) part that is patched separately
DMX Universe
DMX Address
If you click on any of the column headings the list will sort by that column. Click again to change the sort from ascending to descending or vice versa.
DMX
view
If you choose the DMX option Vista displays a table view where each cell shows the DMX channel and its output level:
Vista User Guide, Version 2 4 ‐ 9
Controlling the fixtures Patching your rig
You use this screen to display the output values of each and every DMX channel.
Each cell displays the channel number and it’s DMX output value. The cells are clear if there is no output and change to a highlighted box if the output is adjusted. To display another output simply click on one of the other Universe tabs at the top of the display.
Controlling
the
fixtures
The Patch menu includes commands to control whatever fixtures are currently selected on the Patch panel there are also buttons for three of these commands:
Note that only some fixture types support these functions; refer to the user guide for your fixture types.
This command… does this…
Ignites the lamps in the selected fixtures.
Strike
Switches off the lamps in the selected fixtures off.
Douse
Reset
Resets the selected fixtures to their factory default settings. This is useful if a fixture has a control problem and you need to get it ‘back to normal’.
Holds the fixture in it’s current settings.
For example to provide fixed lighting for backstage.. Once you’ve parked a fixture it will ignore all instructions until it is un-parked.
Unpark Sets a parked fixture to operate normally.
Â
These five commands are available through the Fixture menu and by rightclicking on the fixture icons in the Programmer or Patch window.
Cloning
fixtures
Cloning is a special way to add fixtures to your patch. This method is useful if you’ve already programmed your show and want to include some new fixtures automatically in any Clips, Groups and Presets that you’ve created.
To clone one or more fixtures:
1.
Select the fixture(s) you want to clone from the Patch table or list view.
4 ‐ 10 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Patching your rig Exporting and importing patch information
2.
Select the ‘Clone Fixtures’ option from the Patch menu or right-click on the patched fixture and select Clone from the popup menu. Vista creates a clone of the selected fixture(s) in the fixture pool at the bottom of the Patch window
3.
Drag the cloned fixture(s) into the patch table.
Â
You can change the fixture type of the cloned fixture(s) by selecting the
‘Change Fixture Type’ option from the Patch menu,
Exporting
and
importing
patch
information
To save time, you can import and export patch information from commaseparated value (.csv) files.
Exporting
the
patch
You can also export a .csv file containing your current show’s patch information.
To do this:
1.
Select the ‘Export Patch file…’ option from the Patch menu. Vista opens the
Export Patch window
2.
Give the file a name. The .csv extension is automatically appended.
3.
Navigate to the directory or folder whee you want to save the file.
4.
Click the Save button to confirm and the new fixtures are added to the patch.
Importing
the
patch
You can also import a .csv file containing your patch information. You can import a file that you have exported from another show or you can create a file in a text editor or spreadsheet program. The easiest way to do this is to create a spreadsheet laid out as follows and save it as a .csv file using the Save as function.
ID Univ:Adrs Fixture Type
1 3:2
36 3:24
Dimmer
Dimmer
41 3:75+3:34 copy_of_Scroller Dimmer
42 3:76+3:35 copy_of_Scroller Dimmer
101 1:1 Mac 2000 Wash (Colour Wheel) 16 bit
102 1:22 Mac 2000 Wash (Colour Wheel) 16 bit
201 2:1
202 2:37
301 1:221
ColorSpot 700E AT Mode 1
ColorSpot 700E AT Mode 1
VL2000 Spot Enhanced 16 bit
Fixture Name
Dimmer
Dimmer
Scrl Dim
Scrl Dim
Mc2000Wc
Mc2000Wc
CSp700a1
CSp700a1
V2000Se6
Vista User Guide, Version 2 4 ‐ 11
Exporting and importing patch information Patching your rig
302 1:241
316 5:1
317 5:17
432 9:1
433 9:44
VL2000 Spot Enhanced 16 bit
Color Block 2 Mode 3
Color Block 2 Mode 3
MediaMaster Layer Full 1.0
MediaMaster Layer Full 1.0
V2000Se6
ColBk2m3
ColBk2m3
MeMaLF10
MeMaLF10
437 12:22 VL3000 Spot VL3000Sp
438 12:50 VL3000 Spot VL3000Sp
In this example the spreadsheet has a header row, which is optional, but shown here for explanation. The columns are laid out like this:
• an ID (1), which determines the fixture’s unique ID
• a Universe : DMX address number (1:1), that sets the
Universe and DMX start address for this fixture
• a Fixture Type (<VL3000 Spot>), that sets the type of fixture that will be patched
• a Fixture Name (<VL3000Sp >), that sets the fixture name.
For two-part fixtures (i.e. fixtures with an external dimmer that is patched separately) you need to include both parts of the patch included in the
Universe/Address column. The format for the two parts is Control+Intensity.
In the example above, Fixture ID 41 is a Scroller Dimmer with the scroller part patched to Universe 3 Channel 75 and the Intensity part patched to Universe 3 channel 34.
The ID, Universe:DMX Address information and Fixture Type must be in the .csv file. If you don’t specify a valid Vista Fixture Type, Vista prompts you to choose the correct fixture from a list when you import the file. The fixture Name does not need to match the name used in the Vista library.
4 ‐ 12 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Patching your rig Configuring the DMX & Ethernet Outputs
Configuring
the
DMX
&
Ethernet
Outputs
V2 Vista does not automatically connect Universes to the DMX outputs on your console or to external Artnet devices. To make these connections you click the
Connect button on the toolbar to open the DMX Connections screen:
You use this screen to connect to Vista’s DMX outputs, to external Ethernet-DMX interface boxes and to broadcast Art-net.
Vista consoles provide up to four 512-channel DMX outputs. You can add up to twelve more outputs by connecting your own external ArtNet or PathPort devices to the Ethernet port. You can also add DMX outputs to a console or computer using the Vista USB-DMX cable.
To configure these connections, click the Universes button on the Patch screen toolbar or select the ‘Connect universes’ option from the Patch menu.
This window shows any devices connected via Ethernet or USB to the console or
PC , and the connection details of the universe. You use it to set up the DMX connections for each of your universes and to check that they are working correctly.
Â
You can also connect more than one output to the same Universe. For instance you can connect Universe 1 to DMX output 1 and to an Artnet broadcast device
Vista User Guide, Version 2 4 ‐ 13
Configuring the DMX & Ethernet Outputs Patching your rig
Connecting
Universes
to
the
Console
DMX
&
Ethernet
Outputs
The DMX connections window lists all the internal DMX connections, USB-DMX,
Ethernet-DMX connection boxes and ArtNet compatible devices attached and visible to the Vista:
In this example above you can see several entries: four are the T4 console’s inbuilt DMX connections ; the others are Ether-Lynx (Art-net) DMX outputs which are on an external interface boxes attached via Ethernet. You may also have Pathport devices and the Vista USB to DMX cable.
Â
If you can’t see a device that you’ve attached to the Vista it may still be possible to connect to it by using the ‘ArtNet Broadcasting’ mode.
To connect a console or control surface DMX output:
1.
Find the row that corresponds to the DMX output .
2.
Click on the box in the ‘DMX Universe’ column and either type a Universe number or use the up and down arrow buttons to select the Universe you want.
To connect an external interface box:
1.
Find the row that corresponds to the Interface box output. Some boxes will have multiple outputs.
2.
Click on the box in the ‘DMX Universe’ column and either type a Universe number or use the up and down arrow buttons to select the Universe you want.
Disconnecting
an
output
To disconnect a DMX output or interface box:
3.
Find the row that corresponds to the DMX output or interface box output.
4.
Click on the box in the ‘DMX Universe’ column and either type ‘0’ or use the down arrow buttons to select the ‘Not Assigned’ option.
Â
To change the settings of an interfac re-connect it with the new settings. e box you may have to disconnect it and
ArtNet
Broadcast
Mode
Some ArtNet-compatible devices may not appear in the DMX Connections window. In this case you can set Vista to broadcast ArtNet information without first establishing comm universes. To do this: unication with the device. You can broadcast to up to four
1.
Find one of the Art-net Broadcast Device lines, there are four available.
4 ‐ 14 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Patching your rig Configuring the DMX & Ethernet Outputs
2.
Click on the box in the ‘DMX Universe’ column and either type a Universe number or use the up and down arrow buttons to select the Universe you want.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 4 ‐ 15
The Chooser screen
The Chooser window
5.
The
Chooser
window
The
Chooser
screen
To get all your fixtures up and running you click the Chooser button on the toolbar at the top of the screen. If this is the first time you’ve opened this window you should be in the Live tab, otherwise click on the Live tab to make it active.
Vista displays the Fixtures screen:
This screen consists of four main elements:
1.
The Editor control section where you can select to work with the Live editor tab or any Cuelist you have open. If you have a Cuelist open this section expands to include the Cue navigation controls.
2.
The Fixture layout panel, where you can display and arrange the fixture icons to suit your requirements.
3.
The sidebar where you can use the palette and component panels to adjust
Intensity, Position, Colour, Gobo, Beam and other settings for each fixture.
4.
The multi-quickpicker panel where you can select Presets, Groups and other components. This panel is optional and can be closed so that there is more room for the fixture layout panel.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 1
Arranging fixtures in a layout The Chooser window
Arranging
fixtures
in
a
layout
Vista displays all of the fixtures you added on the Patch screen as icons on the
Fixture layout panel. When you first view this screen, the fixtures are arranged in numerical order, by unique ID, as a bank of icons.
To re-arrange the fixtures:
1.
Click on the ‘Locked’ button at the bottom of the Chooser window so that it changes to ‘Unlocked’.
2.
Drag and drop the fixture icons around to new locations on the screen so that they suit you.
3.
To undo a move press Ctrl + Z or select the undo option from the Edit menu.
4.
When you are finished Click on the ‘Unlocked’ button so that it changes back to ‘Locked’.
Â
If you are moving a Group icon, click and hold on it while moving to avoid selecting and moving the individual fixtures in the group.
Zooming
in
and
out
You can adjust the magnification of the fixture layout panel or the size of individual fixture and group icons.
To zoom the fixture layout panel in or out click on the magnify icons in the bottom left corner of the fixture chooser window:
To zoom an individual fixture and group icon, hold down the yellow modifier button or Control key while licking the icons
This icon… does this… zooms in or increases the size of the fixture icons. zooms out or decreases the size of the fixture icons. zooms to the icons to the normal scale.
Â
You can use the ‘Wheel’ on a suitable mouse to zoom the layout or icons.
Using
different
layout
views
You can create as many different views of your fixtures a s you like, each arranged in its own away. To create a new layout view:
5.
Right-click in the fixture chooser window and select the ‘New Layout’ option from the popup menu. Vista opens the New layout window.
5 ‐ 2 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window Arranging fixtures in a layout
6.
Type a name for the layout and click OK. Vista creates a new layout and adds a corresponding ‘tab’ at the bottom of the layout panel:
7.
Arrange the fixtures as described above.
8.
When you are finished Click on the ‘Unlocked’ button so that it changes back to ‘Locked’.
To switch between layouts click on the tab you want to use. You can select fixtures on one tab, switch to another tab and add more fixtures to the selection.
Managing
layout
views
You can add, rename, duplicate or modify a layout view. To do this select the
‘Manage Layouts’ option from the Chooser menu. Vista opens the Layouts window:
The layout window is divided into three panels:
Layouts
The Layouts panel shows all the layouts you have created. You can:
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 3
Arranging fixtures in a layout The Chooser window
>>
>>
+
-
This icon…
<<
<<
• Rename a layout by double-clicking on the name and typing a new one.
• Change the order of the layout tabs by selecting a layout and moving it up or down the list using the Move Up,
Move Down, Move to Top and Move to Bottom buttons
• Add a new Layout by clicking on the Add Layout button
• Delete a layout by selecting it and clicking on the Delete
Layout button. does this…
Moves the selected layout to the top.
Moves the selected layout up.
Moves the selected layout down.
Moves the selected layout to the bottom.
Adds a new Layout
Deletes the selected layout..
Layout
properties
The Layout properties panel let’s you configure how a layout displays names,
IDs and other properties. To do this:
9.
Select the Layout you want to adjust in the Layouts panel:
This option…
Lock positions does this…
Locks the layout so the fixtures cannot be moved. You can also lock and unlock a layout using the
Locked/Unlocked button beside the layout tabs in the
Fixture Chooser window
Labels show Names Sets the fixture icon text labels to show.
Labels show IDs Sets the fixture icon ID numbers to show.
Labels ignore zoom The label size remains fixed when the fixture icons are zoomed in or out.
Notes ignore zoom The notes size remains fixed when the fixture icons are zoomed in or out.
Auto-show new fixtures
Sets the layout to automatically include any new fixtures added in the Patch window.
5 ‐ 4 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window Arranging fixtures in a layout
This option…
Snap to Grid
Show Gridlines
Grid Spacing does this…
Locks or Unlocks the current layout. Fixture and
Group icons can not be moved when a layout is locked. But they can be scaled.
Display a grid on the Fixture Chooser layout pane
Sets the space between the grid lines. The higher the number the larger the grid spacing.
Save as Default Saves all options set in the current layout as defaults for any new layout.
Â
You can also adjust some of these settings on the ‘Layouts options’ menu
Hiding
and
‘un
‐
hiding’
fixtures
and
groups
You can use the Item Visibility panel to hide any fixtures, fixture types or groups in a layout. This removes them from the display, but not from the patch.
To hide Fixture or Group icon or Notes:
1.
Select the Layout you want to work with from the list in the Layouts panel.
2.
Click the + symbol beside the Fixtures or Groups or Notes heading in the
Item Visibility section to show all the Fixtures types that you’ve patched, the
Groups that have been created and any Notes.
3.
To hide all Fixture icons of a type, un-tick the checkbox beside that fixture type, or click the + symbol beside a fixture type to show all the individual
Fixtures of that type.
4.
To hide all Group, un-tick the checkbox beside ‘Groups’, or click the + symbol to show all the Groups that have been created.
5.
To hide all Notes, un-tick the checkbox beside ‘Notes’, or click the + symbol to show all the Notes that have been created.
6.
To hide individual Fixtures, Groups or Notes of a type un-tick the checkbox beside the items(s) you want to hide.
To reveal (unhide) hidden fixtures, tick the checkbox beside the items you want to reveal.
Â
You can also hide fixture and group icons and notes by righ t-clicking on the icon(s) or note(s) and selecting Hide from the popup menu..
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 5
Arranging fixtures in a layout The Chooser window
Layout
options
The Layout options submenu let’s you quickly configure some commonly used layout properties. To do this:
1.
Select the Layout you want to adjust the Fixture C hooser p anel.
by clicking on its tab at the bottom of
2 .
Select ‘Layou t option s’ from the Chooser menu. Vista displays the submen u:
This option…
False Intensity
Fixed label size
Show selection order does this…
Gives the fixture icon int level to the fixture(s) ensity without sending any
Keeps the fixture label size the same no matter the zoom level of the icons.
Sets the icons to show a selection order num whenever they are selected. ber
Display a grid on the layout pane
When on fixture icons snap to the grid cells
Show grid
Snap to grid
Show names
Show IDs
Auto-add new fixtures
Sets the fixture icon text labels to show.
Sets the fixture icon ID numbers to show.
Sets the layout to automatically include any new fixtures added in the Patch window.
Preview refresh rate Sets the refresh rate for the icons. Higher refresh rates and / o power. r large numbers of icons use more processing
Activating
layout
views
To activate a layout view, click on the tab for the layout you want to display:
Duplicating
a
layout
To duplicate a layout view, click on the tab for the layout you want to duplicate then select the Duplicate Layout option from the Chooser menu. Vista displays the Duplicate Layout windo w.
Type a name for the layout and click OK. Vista creates a copy layout and adds a corresponding ‘tab’ at the bottom of the layout panel.
5 ‐ 6 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window Arranging fixtures in a layout
L ayout
organ isatio n
There are a number of ways to customise layouts and the way the fixture icons are displayed. To make a change select an op tion from the Chooser menu.
This option…
Colours and
Background
(submenu)
- Background colour does this…
Opens a submenu
Opens a colour picker to set the background colou r of the layout panel
- Background image Opens a window to select an image to use as a background of the layout panel. An image size of about 700 x 560px will fill the layout pane
- Erase Background image
- Icon Colour
Removes the background image, if you’ve added one.
- Resize Background Selects the background image which can be moved or resized by dragging on the bottom right hand corner.
Click outside the background when finished.
Opens a window to set the outline colour of the selected icon(s)
- Gel Colour
- Set note colour
Opens a window to set the intensity colour of the selected icon(s). Useful for simulating the colour filter on a conventional fixture.
Opens a window to set the colour of the selected note(s). Changes the leader and fill colour.
Shrink to fit
Label position
Manage Layouts
Duplicate Layout
Layouts options
Zooms the layout panel to fit all fixtures.
Moves the icon label to the right, left, top or botto m of the icon.
Opens the Manage Layouts window.
Creates a copy of the current layout and opens a wind ow where it can be named.
Opens the Layouts options window.
L ayout
organ isatio n
2
Â
You can also adjust the layout and icon appearance by right-clicking on the layout or icon(s) or note(s) and selecting an option from the popup menu.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 7
Arranging fixtures in a layout The Chooser window
This option…
Manage Layouts
New layout
Duplicate layout
Delete layout
Rename layout
Rename
Renumber
Delete item
Hide items
Unhide all items
Resize items(s)
Rotate items
Label position
Add note does this…
Opens the Layouts window where you can add, delete, organise and customise your layouts.
Opens the New layout window.
Duplicates the current layout and opens a window to name it.
Immediately deletes the current layout.
Opens the Rename layout window where you can edit the name of the current layout.
Opens the Rename window where you can type a new name for the selected fixture(s)
Opens the Renumber window where you can type a new name for the selected fixture(s)
Hides the selected fixture or group icon or note.
Reveals all hidden items, on the current layout.
Allow you to resize the selected matrix
Lets you rotate the fixture icon(s), using an onscreen handle, to any angle
Moves the icon label to the right, left, top or bottom of the icon.
Adds a text box to the layout panel. If a fixture icon is selected a leader line will be drawn between the icon and the text box.
New Fixture Group Creates a new fixture group containing all the currently selected fixtures.
Update Fixture
Group
Create Matrix
Updates the current group to contain whatever fixtures are selected.
Creates a new matrix grid that you can resize by dragging on the bottom right hand corner.
Tip: Deselect all fixtures to enable this option.
Resize Matrix Allow you to resize the selected matrix
5 ‐ 8 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window
This option…
Align
Distribute
Flip
Arrange in grid
Background colour
Background image
Arranging fixtures in a layout does this…
Lets you align a group of fixture icons, to the right, left, top or bottom of the group.
Lets you distribute a group of fixture icons vertically between the top and bottom fixtures or horizontally between the furthest left and furthest right fixture in the selection.
Swaps the vertical or horizontal position of a group of fixture icons. The left most fixture will move the right most and so on.
Opens the Grid window to arrange the selected items in a grid. Items can be arranged into rows and columns and sorted by ID or selection order
Opens a colour picker to set the background colour of the layout panel
Opens a window to select an image to use as a background of the layout panel. An image size of about 700 x 560px will fill the layout pane
Removes the background image, if you’ve added one. Erase Background image
Resize Background
Icon Colour
Gel Colour
Set note colour
Selects the background image which can be moved or resized by dragging on the bottom right hand corner.
Click outside the background when finished.
Opens a window to set the outline colour of the selected icon(s)
Opens a window to set the intensity colour of the selected icon(s). Useful for simulating the colour filter on a conventional fixture.
Opens a window to set the colour of the selected note(s). Changes the leader and fill colour.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 9
Arranging fixtures in a layout The Chooser window
Adding
notes
to
the
layout
window
You can add text boxes to the fixture window to help identify different fixture types or areas. Notes can be either attached to an object on the layout, such as a fixture, or can be independent.
To add a note you do this:
1.
To attach a note to a fixture or group, first select the item. For an independent note make sure no fixtures or groups are selected.
2.
Right-click in the fixture window and select ‘Add note’ from the popup menu. Vista creates a note on the layout.
3.
Type a note and then click on the layout background to finish.
To move a note first unlock the layout then click on the text and drag it to a new location. To edit a note double click on the text and replace or change the text. To delete a note right-click on the note and select ‘Delete item’ from the popup menu.
Arranging
fixtures
in
a
grid
You can arrange fixtures in rows and columns. To do this:
1.
Select the fixtures you want to arrange into a grid
2.
Right-click in the fixture window and select ‘Arrange in grid…’ from the popup menu. Vista opens the Arrange in Grid window:
5 ‐ 10 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window Arranging fixtures in a layout
This option…
Rows
Columns does this…
Specify the number of rows you want in the grid. If you enter a value here the number of columns is calculated automatically.
Specify the number of columns you want in the grid. If you enter a value here the number of rows is calculated automatically.
User ID
Type / User ID
Sort the fixtures by ID number
Sort the fixtures by type name then ID number
Selection Order Sort the fixtures into the order they have been selected
3.
Click the OK button to arrange the fixtures.
Placing
fixtures
in
a
Matrix
You can put fixtures in a special ‘Matrix’ container so that they can be controlled individually or as a whole. When fixtures are placed on a matrix you can:
• Select the matrix and apply settings to all fixtures within it
• Select fixtures, in the matrix and apply individual settings to just the ones you have selected
• Apply matrix effects that run on the X and Y axis of the matrix. For example you can have an intensity effect that runs across the matrix like a sliding door or a colour effect that runs around the matrix like a clock hand.
• Apply an animated gif Video effect.
To create a matrix container and place fixtures in it:
1.
Right-click on the fixture layout panel and select the Create Matrix option from the popup menu. Vista creates a matrix container on the current layout:
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 11
Arranging fixtures in a layout The Chooser window
2.
Adjust the size of the matrix by clicking on the handle on the bottom right hand corner and dragging to the size you want.
3.
Drag your fixtures into the matrix. You can either drag them one by one or as a group. If you drag a group of fixtures onto the matrix Vista places them across and then down the matrix in ID order.
Selecting
fixtures
The simplest way to select fixtures is to click on the fixture or group icons one by one but Vista provides three selection tools and several options to make more complex selections.
Selection
tools
To select a number of fixtures you can draw a ‘marquee’ around (or over) the fixtures you want. Vista provides three marquee tools.
To select the tool you want by click on one of the icons in the lower right corner of the fixture layout panel or choose one of the ‘Selection tool’ options from the
Layouts menu:
This icon… does this…
Draws a rectangular marquee as you click and drag across a group of fixtures.
Let’s you select fixtures by drawing a freehand shape around the ones you want.
Let’s you select fixtures by drawing a line through the ones you want.
5 ‐ 12 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window Arranging fixtures in a layout
Sorting
fixtures
It’s often important to sort fixtures in a certain order. For example when you are, storing groups, applying effects fanning parameters or copying and pasting information from one set of fixtures to another.
Vista lets you show the selection order and quickly sort fixtures based on their
ID, selection order, layout position and more.
Displaying
the
selection
order.
To display the selection order, choose the ‘Show selection order’ option from the
Options sub-menu on the Layout menu.
Vista displays the selection order number in a small circle on the top left side of the fixture icon:
Sorting
fixtures
You can sort fixtures in a number of ways. To do this, select the fixtures then click the Sort order dropdown on the main toolbar. Vista displays the Sort popup window:
This option… sorts the fixtures in…
Custom Sort An order you create in the Custom sort window. Custom sort includes several advanced options as described below.
Selection the order in which you selected them on the Fixtures chooser layout.
ID ID number order.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 13
Arranging fixtures in a layout The Chooser window
Random
Position random order. Each time you de-select and re-select fixtures they are sorted into another random order. by columns and rows, from top left to bottom right, based on their position in the layout window.
Manage Sorts This option opens the Manage Sorts window where you can customise and save sorts.
Creating
custom
sort
orders
When you select the ‘Custom Sort’ option Vista displays the Custom Sort window:
You can use this window to create a new sort that includes advanced options for grouping fixtures together, repeating applied settings and setting the type of fan shape that will be used when fanning a value across the selected fixtures.
This option… does this…
Sort Fixtures by.. sets the basic sort type. The options are as described above –
ID, Selection Random or Position.
Fan Shape
Curve
Let’s you store a fan shape that will be recalled when a saved sort order is selected. See ‘Fan shapes’ on page xxx sets the distribution of fixtures, along the fan shape. The normal setting is ‘Linear’and in this case the fixtures are evenly distributed. Other curves, such as square and inverse square will bunch some of the fixtures together and spread others out.
Sort Direction Sets the sort order to ascending or descending.
5 ‐ 14 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window
Fixture
Ganging
Blocking
Repeat
Ganging
Save as…
Arranging fixtures in a layout allow fixtures grouped together, so that if you spread or fan a feature setting across some fixtures, the settings can be in blocks and / or repeated throughout the selection. See the examples below.
Let’s you group fixtures in "blocks" of consecutive fixtures.
You can set just one block size, for example 2 or set several different block sizes (e.g. first block has 4 fixtures, second block has 6 fixtures and so on).
To set complex blocking separate the block sizes with a /
(forward slash). For example 4/6
Let’s you repeat feature settings on every 2 nd , 3 rd, 4 th or any increment of fixtures.
Opens the Custom Sort ‘Save as’ window where you can name and save your custom sort
Selecting
Odd
and
Even
numbered
fixtures
You can select just the odd or even numbered fixtures from the fixtures you have selected by setting “Sort fixtures by” to ID and "repeat ganging" to 2 in the sort dialogue. Then, using the next and previous fixture buttons, you can toggle between controlling the odd and even fixtures.
Custom
Ganging
examples
In these examples, there are 10 colour mixing fixtures selected and colour is fanned across the fixtures using a Custom sort with the following Ganging
(Blocking and Repeat) settings:
1.
Blocking set to 3, Repeats set to ‘0’ (No repeats)
2.
Blocking set to 3, Repeats set to ‘2’
3.
Blocking set to 1/2/3, Repeats set to ‘0’ (No repeats)
4.
Blocking set to 2/3, Repeats set to 2
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 15
Arranging fixtures in a layout The Chooser window
Custom
Fan
shapes
In these examples, there are 10 fixtures selected and intensity is fanned across the fixtures using the following Fan shapes:
1.
Fan from Centre:
2.
Fan from both ends:
Fan
shapes
The are several fan shapes that can be set and saved in a Custom sort.
This option… does this…
Linear Fan
Diverged from centre.
Fanned values radiate in both positive and negative directions from the base value, starting from the centre of the fixture selection
Fan from end
Linear from Start
Fan from both ends
Linear from Centre
The fanned feature values radiate in one direction from the base value, starting from the first selected fixture.
Fan from start
Linear from End
Inverted fan
Diverged from extremities
The fanned feature values radiate in one direction from the base value, starting from the last selected fixture.
Fan from centre.
Linear from Extremities
The fanned feature values radiate in one direction from the base value, starting from the first and last selected fixtures.
The fanned values radiate in both positive and negative directions from the base value, starting from the first and last selected fixture.
The fanned feature values radiate in one direction from the base value, starting from the centre of the fixture selection.
5 ‐ 16 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window Arranging fixtures in a layout
Â
To fan a feature or events, select the fan mode and hold the Yellow modifier or Control key while setting the feature value or dragging the event bars.
Â
The Vista V1 "Mirror" o
‘Inverted Fan’ shapes. ption is replaced by the ‘Fan from Centre’ and
Managing
your
saved
Sorts
You can rename, duplicate or modify a saved sort. To do this select the ‘Manage
Sorts’ opti window: on from the Sort order drop down list. Vista opens the Manage Sorts
1.
Select the Sort name in the left hand panel. ort you’ve saved, do this:
2.
Modify the Fixture sort, Fan options and other settings.
3.
Click the ‘Save’ button.
Renaming
a
Sort
You can rename a sor t by double clicking on the name, in the left column, and typing a new name.
Duplicating
a
Sort
To make a copy of a sort, select it and click on the ‘Duplicate’ button.
Deleting
a
Sort
To delete a sort, select it and click on the ‘Delete’ button.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 17
Using the Programmer Sidebar The Chooser window
Using
the
Programmer
Sidebar
The Programmer Sidebar has two tabs:
The Palette tab includes panels fixtures: intensity, position, co
to control all the main aspects of your lighting lour gobo and beam.
The Components tab includes the items you store such as Groups, Presets,
Extracts and Snapshots along with the in-built effects.
The
Palette
tab
If it’s not already selected, click on the Palett e tab in the sidebar
Summary
or
detailed
view
You switch between the ‘All’ (or summary) view and the detailed views of the d iffer ent control pa nels using the 7 buttons below the Palette tab.
This button… does this…
All displays a combined view of the most commonly used controls for Intensity, Position, Colour, Gobo and Beam displays a detailed view of the Intensity controls displays a detailed view of the Position controls displays a detailed view of the Colour controls displays a detailed view of the Gobo controls displays a detailed view of the Beam controls
Custom displays controls for every feature of the selected fixture(s).
These controls are mainly used to control features that d o not appear on the other panels or to set chanels to values that are normally not used.
5 ‐ 18 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window The Palette tab
Common
features
of
the
palettes
All palettes have a popup menu that you open by clicking the palette type button:
Click on the drop down arrow on any of the palette type button to open a popup menu
This option…
Clear
Home does this…
This option lets you clear all events for that parameter type or just some of those events. For example the
Colour popup lets you clear the Colour wheel or Colour
Mix or just the individual CMY events
This option lets you reset all events for that parameter type to their default setting (for example no intensity,
50% pan and tilt, colour white etc).
This option opens the Preset window so you can create a new preset.
Create Pres et
New Effect
Clicking on this option opens the Create effect window where you can select an effect type, the features to include and enter a name for the effect.
Stop effect
This option lets stop effe parameter type cts that are running for that
Many of the palettes h ave slider bars that provide a quick and easy way to set a value:
To adjust a slider setting, either:
• click the arrows at the left or right hand end to go to 0% and 100% respectively
• click and drag in the slider b ar to set the value you want
• click in the value box and type a value using the keyboard .
To set attributes for one or more fixtures, select the fixtures you want in the
Fixture Chooser panel, then click on the Palette you want to use.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 19
The Palette tab The Chooser window
Checking
that
everything
is
working
One of the first things you’ll probably want to do after setting up your rig and patching it all in on the Patch screen, is check that everything’s working. The quickest way to do this is to select the fixtures, one-by-one or in groups on the colour up a bit.
To do this:
1.
Select the ‘All’ view of the palettes.
2.
Select one or more fixt ures in the Fixture panel.
3.
Click the right-arrow icon at the end of the Intensity slider on the intensity palette.
4.
Click anywhere in the colour palette.
5.
The selected fixtures show t hat colour at full intensity
Â
You can also use the encoder wheels to set Intensity, Position, Colo any other parameter. ur and
Â
If you can’t s an turned fully c ck rom your fixtures check that the Grand Master lo wise and that the faders on the Superplayback panel are up. is
Highlight
and
Lowlight
When you are focusing or testing your fixtures you can use Highlight feature to bring up the intensity of each fixture automatically when you select it.
To do this, either:
• Click the Highlight button – normally softbutton #4
(F4 on your keyboard or,
• Select the Highlight option from the Tools menu (Ctrl+H).
You can alter how highlight works by updating the highlight and lowlight presets. Se e The Highlight and Lowlight presets on page 5-47.
5 ‐ 20 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window Using the All panel
Using
the
All
panel
The All panel has controls for all the most commonly used features of your fixtures. I t provides a quick easy way to set Intensity, Position, Colour, Gobo and
Beam without swapping panels. The same controls plus any advanced ones are available on the individual feature panels. See page xxx
Intensity
In this view the Intensity panel show s the most used intensity features :
In this view:
• the 10 to 90 buttons sets the intensity of the selected fixtures to the corresponding percentage value
• the Intensity slider contr ols the intensity of the selected fixtures in a percentile range.
You’ll notice that as you change the intensity settings, the icons on the Fixture panel change to reflect this.
Position
The Position panel g ives you control of the direction in which the selected fixtures are aimed:
To adjust the position , click on the round target symb you want . ol and drag it to the spot
You’ll notice that as you change the position ‘compass’ on the Fixture pane l icons change to reflect this.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 21
Using the All panel The Chooser window
Fine
Mode
Some parameters, such as position, can be difficult to control when the palette is in normal mode. To switch to fine click on the ‘Fi fine mode off. ne’ button. Repeat this to turn
Setting
colour
The Colour palette provides four buttons so you can choose the way you want to set your colours:
• HSV – hue and saturation values
• Sliders – Cyan, Magenta, Yellow or Red, Green, Blue or
Hue, Saturation, Value sliders
• Swatch – colours by Lee name and number
• Colour wheel – for fixtures that have colour wheels.
Hue
and
Saturation
values
The HSV tab provides a colour spec trum and a saturation slider:
To pick a hue and its saturation, just click on the shade you want in the spectrum area, and drag the slider bar below the colour panel to set the saturation level.
Cyan,
Magenta
and
Yellow/Red,
Gr een
Blue
This tab gives you the option of setti ng your colour using either CMY or RGB or
HSV values:
Click the relevant ‘slider mode’ button to choose the method you want, then adjust the sliders to set the colour.
5 ‐ 22 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window Using the All panel
Swatch
This tab provides the actual gel colours, numbers and names from the Lee swatchbook so you can pick the exact colour you want:
Click in the Colour, Number (#) or Name (N) button to sort the list by name number or colour. You can also search for a name or number by typing in the search box.
Colour
wheel
When using fixtures with colour wheels, you can use this tab to select the colour slot (or position) you want this fixture to use:
Fixtures that have more than one colour wheel will show a line of available colours for each wheel. The colours are di splayed in the same order as they are on the wheel. Just click on the colour swatch to select it.
You can move the colour wheel by small in clicking on the Index button and adj crements, to create slit colours, by usting the slider to rotate the wheel forwards or backwards.
You can also rotate or spin the by clicking the wheel forwards or backwards:
on the Rotate button and slider to spin
If the colour wheel is spinning you can reverse the spin direction by clicking on the Reverse icon or stop it by clicking on the Stop icon.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 23
Using the All panel The Chooser window
Setting
gobo
The Gobo summary panel displays icons of the gobos available on the selected fixtures:
If you have only one t the gobo types of that ype of fixture selected, the icons Vista displays represent all
fixture. Fixtures that have more than one gobo wheel w ill show a line of availab same order as the le gobos for each wheel. The gobos are displayed in the y are on the wheel. You can select a gobo from one wheel and t open or a gobo from each wheel to combine the patterns .
To choose a gobo, click on the icon re presenting the gobo shape you want. If you have more than o ne type of fixture selected the gobo icons will be greyed o ut because their gobos a re different..
Rotation
You can move the gobo whee l by small increments, to create split patterns, by clicking on the Wheel and Index buttons and adjusting the slider to rotate the wheel forwards or backwards.
You can also rotate or spin the Gobo wheel by clicking on the Wheel and Rotate buttons and adjusting the slider to spin the wheel forwards or backwards. If the gobo wheel is spinning you can reverse the spin direction by clicking on the
[Reverse Icon] or stop it by clicking on the [Stop icon]
On some fixtures you can rotate the i ndividual gobos. For these fixtures:
• You can move the select align the im ed gobo by small increments, to age, by clicking on the Gobo and Index buttons and adjusting the slider to rotate the gobo clockwise or anti-clockwise.
• You can also spin th e selected gobo by clicking on the Gobo and Rotate buttons and adjusting the slider to spin the gobo clockwise or anti-clockwise.
• If the gobo slot is spinning you can reverse the spin direction by clicking on clicking on the Reverse icon or stop it by clicking on the Stop icon.
5 ‐ 24 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window Using the All panel
Setting
beam
size
and
focus
The summary Beam panel has two tabs for controlling the most used beam attributes:
Focus
The Focus tab controls the focus and zoom of the selected fixtures:
Use the focus slider to soften or sharpen the beam shape. U se the Zoom slider to make the beam spread softer or sharper.
Iris
The Iris tab controls the beam size (or diameter) of the sele have an iris. cted fixtures, if they
Use the iris slider to make the beam size. Use the Zoom slid size smaller or larger. er to make th e beam
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 25
Using the detailed panels The Chooser window
Using
the
detailed
panels
Intensity
Click on the Intensity button to select the detailed settings panel for all fixture channe ls in the Intensity group:
In this view:
• the 10 to 90 buttons set the intensity of the selected fixtures to the corresponding percentage value.
• the end most percentage buttons set the level to 0% or
100% while the other in 5% or 10% s increase or decrease it increments.
• the Intensity slider controls the inte nsity of the selected fixtures in a percentile range
• if the selected fix tures have a strobe capability, the Strob e slider controls the speed of the strobe
• if the selected fixtures have blackout shutters, the Opened and Closed buttons set the shutter position.
Custom
va lues
Some fixtures have effects and other special features that can be used by setting a channel to a particular value. These features vary from fixture to fixture so they aren’t included in Vista’s ‘generic’ controls.
See About Custom values on page 5-35 panels. for more details on using the custom control
5 ‐ 26 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window Using the detailed panels
Position
The detailed Position panel provides a larger version of the position target panel.
You’ll notice that using the Pan and Tilt sliders located on panel.
on this panel you can also adj ust just the pan or just the tilt by the bottom and left side of the target
Fine
mode
Position, can be difficult to control when the palette is in normal mode. To switch to fin mode click the ‘Fine button’. e
Flip
Click this button to rotate and invert the fixture(s) so that it is pointing at the same position.
Custom
values
Some fixtures have effects and other special features that can be used by setting a channel to a particular value. These features vary from fixture to fixture so they aren’t included in Vista’s ‘generic’ controls.
See About Custom values on page 5-35 for more details on using the custom control panels.
Colour
The detailed Colour palette let’s you choose how to control the colour mixing mechanism and the colour wheel(s) in your fixtures:
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 27
Using the detailed panels The Chooser window
The buttons, in the middle of the colour panel select the colour mechanism. There are three options.
• HSV – hue and saturation values.
• Lee – Lee colo ur s watch.
• Wheel – pick a col our from the fixture’s colour wheel
If a fixture only has a colour mixing mec hanism (CMY / RGB) you ca n choose a colour from the HSV or Lee swatch sect mechanism. The colour wheel section w ion and it will be applied to the mixer ill not be available.
If a fixture has a colour mixing mechani you can choose a colour from the HSV o sm (CMY / RGB) and a Colour wheel r Lee swatch section and it will be applied to the mixer mechanism. You ca n also choose a co lour from the Wheel section of the colour panel it will be applied to the colour wheel. This means you can set different colours for the mix mechanism and the wheel.
If a fixture only has a Colour wheel(s) you can choose a colour from the HSV, Lee or Wheel section of the colour panel it will be applied to the colour wheel. If you choose colours from the HSV or Lee section the nearest colour on the wheel is selected.
5 ‐ 28 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window Using the detailed panels
Hue
and
Saturation
values
When you select the HSV colour option the colour panel provides a colour pic panel and a set of sl iders: ker
To pick a hue and its saturation, just click on the shade you want in the spectrum area, and drag around to select a colour and set the saturation level.
You can also adjust the colour using the three sliders. Click the HSV, CMY or
RGB ‘slider mode’ button to choose the method you want, then adjust the sliders to set the colour.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 29
Using the detailed panels The Chooser window
Lee
Swatch
This option provides a list of Lee filters so you can pick a colour by it’s name, number or swatch.
Click in the Colour, Number (#) or Name (N) button to sort the list by name number or col swatch. You can also search for a name or our number by typing in the search box.
Wheel
When using fixtures with a colour wh representation of the colour wheel so eel(s), this option provides a graphic
you can see exactly what colours are available and where they are on the w heel:
If a fixture has more than one colour wheel the buttons above the colour wheel will be available. To choose the colour wheel you want to work with click on the corresponding button.
You can move the colour wheel by small increments, to create split colours, by clicking on the Index button and adjusting the slider to turn the wheel forwards or backwards.
You can also rotate or spin the colour wheel by clicking on the Rotate buttons and adjusting the slider to spin the wheel forwards or backwards:
If the colour wheel is spinning you can reverse the spin direction by clicking on the [Reverse Icon] or stop it by clicking on the [Stop icon]
If you have more than one type of fixture selected, Vista displays a tab for each fixture type at the top of the panel. . To choose the fixture type you want to work with click on the corresponding tab.
5 ‐ 30 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window Using the detailed panels
Custom
values
Some fixtures hav e e fects and other special features that can be used by setting channel to a particula aren’t included in Vis r value. These features vary from fixture to fixture so they ta’s ‘generic’ controls.
a
See About Custom value panels. s on page 5-35 for more details on using the custom control
Gobo
The detailed Gobo pa you can see exactly w nel provides a graphic representation of the gobo wheel hat patterns are available an so d where they are on the wheel:
If a fixture has more than one gobo wheel the buttons above the gobo wheel will be available. To choose the wheel you want to work with click on the corresponding button.
Rotation
You can move the gobo wheel by small increments, to create split patterns, by clicking on the Wheel and Index button and adjusting the slider to turn the wheel forwards or backwards.
You can also rotate or spin the wheel by clicking on the Wheel and Rotate buttons and adjusting the slider to spin the wheel forwards or backwards. If the colour wheel is spinning you can reverse the spin direction by clicking on the [Reverse Icon] or stop it by clicking on the [Stop icon]
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 31
Using the detailed panels The Chooser window
On some fixtures you can rotate the individual gobos. For these fixtures:
• You can move the selected gobo by small increments, to align the image, by clicking on the Gobo and Index bu ttons and adjusting the slider to rotate the gobo clockwise or anti-clockwise.
• You can also spi and Rotate butto n the se lected gobo by clicking on the Gobo ns and adjusting the slider to spin the gobo clockwise or anti-clockwise.
• If the gobo slot is spinning you can reverse the spin direction by clic king on the [Reverse Icon] or stop it by clicking on the [ Stop icon]
If you have more than one type of fixture selected, Vista displays a tab for each fixture type at the top of the panel. . To choose the fixture type you want to work with click on the corresponding tab.
Custom
DMX
Some fixtures have effects and other special features that can be used by setting a channel to a particular value. These features vary from fixture to fixture so they aren’t included in Vista’s ‘generic’ controls.
5 ‐ 32 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window Using the detailed panels
Beam
The detailed Beam panel provides sliders for all the beam features and a graphic representation of frame (shaping s hutters) , if the fixtures have this feature:
Focus
Use the focus slider to soften or sharpen the beam shape.
Zoom
Use the Zoom sl r angle narrower or w ider.
Iris
The Iris tab controls the beam size (or diameter) of the selected fixtures.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 33
Using the detailed panels The Chooser window
Framing
The Frame tab is specifically for fixtures that have beam shaping frames, so yo can shutter-off parts of the beam: u
To set the posit ions you want the frames to be in on the selected fixtures, click and drag each frame to the position you want, as shown in this example:
You can also set the rotation angle of the shape or continuously rotate t shape using the slider: he whole
• Index – to turn the framing shutters to the preferred angle click the Index button and move the slider to set the position.
• Rotate – to continuously rotate the whole shutter assembly click the
Rotate button and move the slider to set the speed and direction.
Custom
values
Some fixtures have effects and other special features that can be used by setting a channel to a particular value. These features vary from fixt ure to fixture so they aren’t included in Vista’s ‘generic’ controls.
See About Custom values on page 5-35 for more details on using the custom control panels.
Custom
The detailed Custom panel provides a separate mini setting panel for every channel of th e selected fixture. The mini panels are arranged in sections according to their feature type – Intensity, Position, Colour, Gobo, Beam and
Miscellaneous. The ‘Misc’ section contains all the mini control panels for all channels that don’t belong in the IPCGB feature groups.
Click on any of the Feature type headings to open that section.
5 ‐ 34 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window Using the detailed panels
About
Custom
values
Some fixtures have effects and other special features that can only be used by setting a channel to a particular value. These features vary from fixture to fix ture so they aren’t incl uded in Vista’s ‘generic’ controls.
For example some fixtures have special settings for the Strobe channel that provide a random strobe effect. Moving the Vista strobe slider to the left or right will never set the effect running because the slider only operates in the (generic) range that sets the strobe to fast or slow.
To access the special channel features you use th e small Custom control panels
Custom
panels
The small custom panels are divided into 3 sections:
• the top section shows the name of the channel in a colour coded bar.
• the centre section shows the channel range. This will normally be the same as the channel name but will change if a s pecial range is selected – see below.
• the bottom section shows the channel value. Normally this is shown valu as a DMX value (0-255) but can be changed to a % e by de-selecting the DMX button.
You can set a custom channel value in three way s:
• click on the up and down buttons, in the bottom section, to adjust the value by + or – 1 each time you click a button
• click valu in on the value display to highlight it and type a new e with the keyboard
• click in on the value display to highlight it and while hold chan ing the pen or mouse button down, not that the curso r curso ges to an up/down arrow. Now move the pen or r up or down as though you were adjusting a slider.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 35
Using the detailed panels The Chooser window
F n p or many fixtu eed to be set t res the Vista o for a parti anel’s title bar o feature window: r double-
library inclu des information about the value channels cular effect. In this case you can cli ck on the custom click anywhere on the panel to open the Custom
Custom
feature
window
The custom feature window range that is in the Vista lib
lets you select any special values or a value within a rary for the selected fixture:
This field…
Name
Range Fader (to
Search p) Adjusts the channel value within the selecte d range if such a range exists.
Channel Fader (lowe r) Adjusts the channel value to any value in the DMX range – 0-255.
For fixtures with large numbers of custom values example media servers) you can type in this field locate a special value or range by name.
(for
to
Sort does this…
Shows the name of the channel or selected chann el range.
Icon Size
For fixtures with large numbers of custom channels
(for example media servers) you can sort the values by ID# (usually as the values appear in the fixtures
DMX channel chart) or by Name.
Adjusts the size of the custom value/range selector buttons in the right hand column.
5 ‐ 36 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window
This field…
Range buttons
DMX / Units
Associated feature panels
The Components tab does this…
In this column there will always be one button that selects the entire channel range (i.e. 0-255).
If the Vista library includes information about the fixtures custom values there will be a button for eac h of the special values or value ranges. Clicking on the button will set the channel to that value or range. If it’s a range you can adjust the value, within that range, using the top slider.
This button selects between DMX values (0-255) and units (normally 0-100)
If there are other features that are associated with the selected feature,they can be selected and adjusted from within the window.
The
Components
tab
If it’s not already selected, click on the Components tab at the top of the sidebar:
This is where you store, select and organize your Groups, presets, Extracts,
Effects, Cuelists and Snapshots. The window is divided into different areas that allow you to:
• choose how you want to view the components
• choose the type of compon ent you want to work with –
Groups, Presets, Effects, Extracts and Snapshots
• choose a component and either activate it or modify it in some way
• create new pages that let you grou p components into custom sets.
This screen provides quick a ccess to all the elements used for programming and playback of a show. To choose the component type you use the buttons at the to p of the left column:
This button… does this…
QP1
QP2 displays a multi-panel ‘Quick picker’. The Quick pickers provide an easy way to arrange and select Presets, Groups,
Extracts SmartFX and more. displays a second multi-panel ‘Quick picker’.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 37
The Components tab The Chooser window
This button… does this…
Groups displays and let’s you s saved. elect or modify the groups you’ve
Presets displays and let’s you select or modify the presets you’ve saved.
FX
Extracts displays and let’s you select any of Vista’s built in effects displays and let’s you sele saved. ct or modify the Extracts. you’ve
The
parameter
Filter
bar
If you are working with Presets, Effects or Extracts the Parameter Filter bar can be used to filter the items that are displayed or the features that are stored:
If you are recording a Preset the filter bar shows which parameters are being recorded and which are not. You can click on any of the icons to either include it or exclude it. Included parameters are highlighted.
For more information about presets and filters see Presets on page 5-45.
If you are applying a item that includes more than one parameter type you can use the filter bar to filter out any parameters you don’t want to use. For example you might have a Preset that includes Intensity, Position and Colour but you only want to use the Colour part. In this case you would click on all the filter bar icons except Colour before selecting the preset.
When you are applying presets from the Components panel the Preset will fade in over the ‘Live Time’ . For example you might be working in the Live programmer tab and want to fade some lights into a colour or position over several seconds. To do you use the Live Time window:
Components
window
tools
If you are working with Groups, Presets, Effects or Extracts there is a toolbar at the bottom of the panel that acts on the list of items
This button… does this…
[ + ] Creates a new component of the selected type.
[ - ]
Search
Allows you to delete a component typing in the ‘Search’ box filters the list down to just the items that match what you’ve typed.
5 ‐ 38 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window
X
This button… does this…
Clears the search box.
The Components tab
Quicker
Picker
panels
The Quick Picker panels provide an e you’ve created: asy way to select any of the following items
• Groups
• Presets
• SmartFX (FX te mplates)
• Cuelists
• Extracts
• Favourites
• Snapshots.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 39
The Components tab The Chooser window
The Sidebar has two panels (QP1 and QP2) that normally display three quickpicker panels. To adjust size of a Quick picker clic k on the divider bar and drag up or down. To hide one or two of the Qu ickpickers drag the divider(s) to the bottom of the panel.
You can set what a Quick picker displays choosing an option from the drop-dow n by menu at the top left side of each column.
Once you’ve chosen the type of inf ormation you want the column to display, you can also select what page you want to display within that column using the second dropdown menu.
To add a page to a quickpicker right click on the panel you want and select ‘add new page’ from the popup menu.
To delete a page from a quickpicker right click on the panel you want and select
‘remove page’ from the popup menu.
Deleting a page does not delete the items on that page.
To copy an item hold the ‘Alt’ key (or Green modifier) while dragging the item from one page to another.
Â
You can also have Quickpickers at the bottom of the main programmer window and on external touchscreen monitors.
T he
Multi
Qu ickpick er
The multi-quickp b icker ottom off the Fixtu contains re Cho select the ‘Multi Quick Pick
4 quickpicker panels and normally appears at the oser and Timeline window. If it’s not already open er’ option from the View > Add Floating Window menu, Vista displays the M ulti Quickpicker
5 ‐ 40 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window The Components tab
T m he Multi Quick ain window or picker is a
it can floa
floating win t on top of or dow, it can either be docked inside the
beside the main window.
T w o un-dock a floating wind indow. To dock a floatin ow, click on the header ba r and drag it off the main g window drag it inside the fixture layout or timelin e panel and d rop it on the le ft, right. top or bottom of the panel.
T w he Multi Quickpick idth of a Quick pic er nor ker cli mally display four quickpicker panels. To adjust t ck on the divider bar and drag left or right. To hid he e one or two of the Quickpickers drag the divider(s) to the right of the panel.
Â
You can als o have Qui ckpickers on externa l touchscreen monitors.
Quickpicker
popup
menu
Dep ending on the component there are various options available on the
Quick picker context menu. To open this menu right-click on the label area of any component. Vista displays the context menu:
This option…
Cuelist Properties
Lock item
Clear item does this…
Opens the Cuelist properties window – see below.
Locks the se lected component. Components that have be locked will not be altered or replaced when a new Pag e or Snapshot is loaded.
Clears the selected playback – the assigned component is removed from the control.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 41
The Components tab The Chooser window
This option…
Clear page does this…
Clears all playbacks on the current page – the assigned components are removed and a blank page is left.
Delete page
Snapshot enabled
Deletes the current page.
Set as default play layout. back Sets the selected cuelist’s buttons and faders as the defaults for all new cuelists.
Allo ws the selected playback to be included in a snapshot.
Set as default cuel configuration ist Sets the selected cuelist’s properties as for all new cuelists. the defaults
Adjust contrast Adjusts the contrast of the selected LCD window
Â
You can also p lay and release cuelists by selectin g them (Alt + select to release) in a Quickpicker that has been configured this way – see below.
Arranging
the
Quicker
Picker
panels
W hen you first d isp buttons in a grid. Y lay a Quick picker panel you’ll see the items are laid out as ou can re-a rrange the items into a single or multi-column list and change the how each item is displayed.
To do this click on t he settings icon to open the Quickpicker settings window:
5 ‐ 42 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window The Components tab
This button… does this…
Icon size adjusts the size of the icons displayed in the Quickpicker.
Text size
Padding adjusts the amount of space available for the label. adjusts the amount of space between the icons.
Icon
Label
Both
Multi-list
Single list
Touch screen click this button to display just an icon for each item. click this button to display just a text label for each item. click this button to displ eac h item. ay both an icon and a text label for click this button to arrange the items in a multi column lis
The items are laid out across and then down. t. click this bu tton to arrange the items in a single column list. click this bu use on an ex tton to arrange the items in a grid suitable for ternal touchscreen.
Icon view
Auto-arrange
Cuelist
Playback
Apply to all click this button to arrange the items in a compact grid of icons without labels.
Arrange the icons by
(number)
Name (alphabetically) or by ID
When the selection box is ticked, selecting a cuelist will play it. To release a cuelist hold th e green modifier (or press Alt) and select the cuelist. click this button to appl windows. y these settings to all Quickpicker
Presets
labels
When you select some fixt ures, the preset labels change to indicate which are available:
This label… indicates…
Greyed this preset do fixtures. es not have any settings stored for the selected
Normal
Ticked this preset has set tings for some or all of the selected fixtures. this preset is being used on the selected fixtures.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 43
Groups The Chooser window
Groups
If you have a big rig, the last thing you want to do is manipulate dozens of individual fixtures. To make it easy to control all the fixtures in your rig Vista auto matically creates groups for each fixture type that you patch. You can also create your own groups.
A gr wha oup can consist of any number of any type of fixtures; it’s entirely up to you t you pu t in a group. Some typical groups might be all the even or odd fixtures of one type, all the fixtures on the back truss, or all the fixtures you’re using on one particular part of the stage.
Creating
groups
When you are f irst creating groups it’s easier to be in a layout that shows the
Groups panel in the sidebar. If you’re seeing something else, click on the
Components tab and select the ‘Groups’ button:
5 ‐ 44 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window
To create a group:
1.
Select the fixtures you want in the group:
Presets
2.
Click the [+] Add Group button at the bottom of opens the Create New Group window: the Group panel. Vista
3.
Type a name for the Group and click OK or press Enter. If you don’t want to name the Group right away you can accept the it later. suggested name and rename
You can create as many groups as you want, an d you can also create any number of ‘groups of groups’.
Presets
Presets are the ‘building blocks’ that you use to create cuelists. They represent common sets of attributes that you know you’re going to want to use over and over again, such as a particular colour (e.g. Red) or position (e.g. on t he d rummer).
I f
Presets are useful for two reasons. ntensity, Position, C ixtures w olour ithout having to
First with presets you can quick ly assign
, Gobo, Beam and other values to any number of adjust the settings individually for each one. Second if you store your cues using without having to edit eve presets you can quickly update all your programming ry cue.
Creating
presets
To create a preset:
1.
Select one or more fixt ures.
2.
Set any of the Intensity , Position, Colour, Gobo, Beam values on the palette the way you want them .
3.
Then either:
• Click on any of the palette type button
‘Create Preset’ op
and select the the ‘Preset’ > tion from the popup menu or,
• Select the ‘New > +Preset’ option from the Components menu ,or
• Click on the ‘+ Preset’ button in the Components toolbar. (To open the
Components toolbar choose the Toolbar > Components toolbar from the
View m enu.
• Right-click in a Pr esets Quickpicker and select the Create preset option .
Vista displays the Creat e New Preset window:
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 45
Presets The Chooser window
4.
Enter a name for the p reset in the name box (beside the icon)
5.
Click on the icon and sel ect and different image if required.
6.
Set the Preset store options:
Th is option…
Update options
Create default for fixtu re
Filter Fixtures
Filter Output
Filter Features does this…
Only applicable if you are updating an existing
Preset. See below
Tick ‘Same Fixture Type’ if you want to be able to use this preset on any fixture, of the same type, even if it is not selected when you store the preset. If you choose this option you’ll see a tick, in the ‘fixture type column’ beside the fixture that will be used as the reference for the preset. C lick on a different fixture’s checkbox to use it as the reference.
Tick ‘Ay Fixture Type’ if you want to be able to use this preset o n any fixture, of any type, even if it is not selected when you store the preset. I f you choose this option you’ll see a tick, in the ‘global’ column beside the fixture that will be used as the reference for the preset. Click on a different fixture’s checkbox to use it as the reference.
Normally only the selected fixtures are included in the Preset. If you want to include all fixtures, in the preset, click on the drop down box and select the
‘All’ option
Normally presets store the values hat the fixture(s) are outputting, no matter whether they are coming the Programme r or fro any Cue that is playing.
To only store values comig from the Current Cue
[Alex] click on the drop down box and select the
‘Current Cue’ option.
Presets are normally per-palette , i.e. you create
5 ‐ 46 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window Presets separate presets for intensity, colour, gobo, beam and miscellaneous features.
However the filter bar lets you in clude or exclude any features.
To include a feature click on it’s icon so that it is highlighted.
To exclude a feature click on it’s icon so that it is not highlighted.
Preview panel The bottom panel of the New Preset window shows a preview of the fixtures you have selected and the features that will be stored in the preset.
7.
Click the OK butto n. Vista creates a new Preset that appears in the Presets panel of the Component Sidebar and in Quickpickers set to show All presets or ones of the feature type you’ve created.
Updating
presets
You can use the Programmer to update the information stored in a preset. To do this:
1.
While a editing the cuelist, select the fixtures you want to change or add to the preset.
2.
Make the adjustments you want using the palettes.
3.
Right-Click on the preset in the Presets panel or a Quick Picker and select
Update from the popup menu.
4.
Vista displays the Update Preset window where you can .
Â
You can also update Presets when you Update a cuelist, tha t’s being played back.
The
Highlight
and
Lowlight
presets
The re are two special presets, Highlight and Lowlight, that set the behaviour of fixtures when Highlight mode is on.
• when you select a fixture it goes to the Highlight preset
• wh en you deselect a fixture it goes to the Lowlight preset.
To edit either of these pr esets you do this:
1.
Set the fixture(s) Intensity, Position, Colour, beam etc.
2.
Right click in the Sid
Highlight Preset’ or ebar, Components, Presets panel and select the ‘Update
‘Update Lowlight Preset’.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 47
Presets The Chooser window
L ive
Time
If you are working live w ith Presets, Palettes or any of the Sidebar panels the
‘Live Time’ window can be used to control crossfade time.
When you are applying a presets or simply selecting a (non-linear) value in the sidebar palettes you can set a time for the Preset or selected value to fa example you might be working in the Li de in. For ve programmer tab and want to fade some lights into a colour or position over several seconds.
To set the Live Time:
1.
Click the ‘Live’ button on the main toolbar. This button is normally mapped to Function K option from t ey F10 on the keyboard. You can also select the ‘Live Time he Tools menu.
2.
Enter a time in seconds or click on the drop down box and select one of th live time presets. e
Live
time
presets
Vista comes with 2 Live time presets: 2s and 5s. But if you regularly use other time settings yo do this: u can save these as presets that appear on the drop down list. To
1.
Click the ‘Live’ button or select t he ‘Live Time option from the Tools menu.
2.
When the Live Time window o the drop down box. Vista open pens select the ‘Custom Timing’ option from s the Custom Timing window.
3.
Set the Fade Time, Delay time and F ade curve for each of the features:
Intensity (Up and Down) Position, Colo ur, Gobo, Beam and Miscellaneous.
This field…
Delay
Does this… sets the fade time in seconds. You can also set the fade time by clicking on the timing bar and dragging the right handle forwards or backwards sets the delay time in seconds. You can also set the delay time by clicking on the timing bar and when the cursor turns into a hand dragging the bar to the right.
5 ‐ 48 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window SmartFX
Fade Curve sets the fade curve. To set the fade curve click on the icon and select an option from the popup list. See the glossary for more about fade curves
4.
Click on the ‘Save as’ button and give this Timing preset a name.
5.
Click OK to save. The new Timing preset will now be available on the Live
Timing drop down box.
SmartFX
Vista comes with a number of built in effects that you can use to quickly create dynamic lo more. oks including intensity pulses, position shapes, colour chases and
To see the built i
This lets you app n effects, click on the Components tab and select the ‘FX’ button. ly one of the built in effects with just one click but you can also use the SmartFX window to modify the built in effect or create your own effect s from scratch.
See the SmartFX window on page 2-2
Applying
a
built
in
effect
To apply an effect:
1.
In the Fixture choos er window, select the fixtures you want.
2.
Click the FX butt on on the Components tab. Vista a list of the built in effects:
3.
You can click on the filter bar icons to either include or exclude effects that include the corresponding parameter types.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 49
Extracts The Chooser window
4.
Click the Stored (Canned) FX tab. Vista displays the list of available stored
(canned) effects. The letters in the ‘content’ column each effect tell you which parameters are in this effect (e.g. I-Intensity, P-Positio n, C-Colour, etc).
5.
To apply an effect, click on the effect you want.
6.
To adjust the parameters of an effect, open the SmartFX window and use the controls to adjust it (see Effect controls on page 7-4).
Effects
that
modulate
or
swing
The built in effects are pre-set to either swing or modulate. Swinging means the fixtures move between two sets of attributes determined by the effect (e.g. moving from to left to right). Effects that are preset to modulate will apply their own varying attributes about a particular setting (e.g. creating a cir position). cle around a
Extracts
Extracts are like progra you define on the pa mming templates and can contain any of the attributes lettes: intensity, colour, beam, position, and so on. They also store the timing associated with the events.
An extract is a section of a cuelist (or range of events) that you can save and reapply in other cu t can save yourself a lot of time re-creating your favourite lighting effects.
Creating
extract s
To create an extract:
1.
Select the part of the cuelist or events on the timeline that you want to use as an extract.
2.
To store an extract, either:
• Select the Extracts button on the Components tab, in the sidebar. Th en click on the + button or
• click on the ‘New Extract button – normally A lt-F8 or
• Right-cl ick in a Extracts pa nel and select the Create extract option.
3 .
Type a name for t he extract and click the OK button.
4 .
Vist a adds the new item to the extract list.
Applying
extracts
To apply an extract:
1 .
Select one or more fixtures in the Fixture chooser window.
5 ‐ 50 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window Using a keypad in the programmer window
2 .
Click the Ex tracts button on the Components tab of the sidebar.
3 .
Find the extract you want and click on it to select it.
Set the mask buttons s o that the attribut es you want are applied. Any attribute that is masked, even if it is part of the extract, will not be applied.
Using
a
keyp ad
in
the
programmer
window
Vista V2 includes a CLI (Command Line Interface) window that provides familiar keypad syntax for sel ecting fixtures, setting intensities and storing cues.
The CLI appears at the bottom of the main editor window and is completely synchronized with the interface so that when you type a command you see the equivalent action happen on the fixture icons and control palettes
The CLI accepts input from your keyboard
CLI window c
or from a suitable USB keypad. The an be left open at all time and will only accept input when the
Using
the
CLI
To open and clos e th command line by clicking View -> Command Line, or b y pressing the Pause button on the keyboard. open the SmartFX window by either:
• clicking the SmartFX butt on on the main toolbar – usually
F?, or
• selecting the Com mand Line option from the View menu
(Ctrl + ?)
• pressing the ‘P ause’ button on your keyboard
Hardware
Keypad
You can use th e keyboard number keys or a separate keypad when the CLI window is showi . T number keys the llo
This button…
/ does this…
Through (also used in storing cues – see below)
* or @ At
** or @@ At +Full
Backspace <- Backspace (Clear)
F Fixture
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 51
Using a keypad in the programmer window
This button… does this…
G Group
S Store All (Look)
The Chooser window
T Time
Selecting
fixtures
t
CLI.
For simple fixture sele ctions you can just type the fixtures numbers. However you can also select Groups and Fix or xture. tures by prefacing the ID numbers with a ‘G’
For example:
• 1 + 5 + 10 Enter selects fixtures 1, 5 and 10
• G1 + F20 Enter selects all the fixtures in group 1 plus fixture 20.
• 1 / 10 – 4 / 6 Enter selects fixtures 1, 2, 3, 7, 8, 9 and 10
Selecting
fixtures
and
setting
levels
in
the
CLI
You can also set levels with the keyboard. To simplify operation Vista automatically complete s some entries.
For fixture ‘through’ selections leaving off the second number means all higher numbered fixtures will be selected.
For intensities single digits are interpreted as tens (@5 is the same as @ 50).
Number.
Setting ‘though’ levels can also fan intensitie s.
For example:
• 1 / 10 @ 50 Enter selects fixtures 1 through 10 and sets them to 50%
• 1 / 10 @ @ selects fixtures 1 through 10 and sets them to
100%
• 1 / 3 @ 20 / 100 Enter selects fixtures 1 through 3 and fa ns their intensities between 20 and 100% (fixture 1=20%, fixture 2=60%, and fixture 3=100%)
• 10 > @ 9 Enter selects all fixtures 10 and above and sets them to 90%
• 1 @ 05 Enter selects fixture 1 and se ts it to 5%.
• 1 @ 5 Enter selects fixture 1 and sets it to 50%.
5 ‐ 52 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window The Programmer hardware controls
Storing
with
the
CLI
The Command Line can also be used to store cues and set timing. For example:
For example:
• S 100 Enter
Store Look Cue 100 to the open or the most recently used
Cuelist.
• S 2 / 10 Enter
Store Look Cuelist 2 Cue 10
• S 5 / 8 T 2/3 Enter
Store Look Cuelist 5 Cue 8 with a 2 second Infade and second outfade time
3
• P 9 / 1 T 2 /3 Enter
Store Part Cuelist 9 Cue 1 with a 2 second Infade and 3 second outfade time.
The
Progra mmer
hardware
controls
With the encoder w heels and associated LCD and buttons on the Vista consoles you can make more ex act adjustme nts than the on-screen palettes. During p rogr obo amming you c
G and Miscellan an use them to adjust setting for Intensity, Position, Colour, eous parameters
Programmer
intens ity
The overall intensit y from the Programmer is controlled by the fader located, on the left side, below the encod er wheels.
Programmer
mode
If the controls are n
‘Menu’ and then se ot already in Programming mode press the button labelled lect the ‘IPCGB’ button:
Vista switches the controls to programming mode:
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 53
The Programmer hardware controls The Chooser window
This button… does this…
I + P Press this button to put the encoders and lower 6 buttons in
Intensity plus Position mode. Pressing it again cycles the controls through any available parameters or alternate modes (Angular position and Strobe & Shutter). Hold the red modifier (or the shift key) and click to cycle the controls in reverse.
Col Press this button to put the encoders and lower 6 buttons in
Colour mode (HSV). Pressing it again cycles the controls through any available parameters or alternate modes (CMY,
RGB, Frame / Index and Colour swatch). Hold the red modifier (or the shift key) and click to cycle the controls in reverse.
Gobo
Beam
Press this button to put the encoders and lower 6 buttons in
Gobo mode. Pressing it again cycles the controls through any available parameters or alternate modes. Hold the red modifier (or the shift key) and click to cycle the controls in reverse.
Press this button to put the encoders and lower 6 buttons in
Beam mode. Pressing it again cycles the controls through any available parameters or alternate modes. Hold the red modifier (or the shift key) and click to cycle the controls in reverse.
Home Sets the associated parameter to it’s default values. I.E. would set Intensity to 0.
Â
Holding the Yellow modifier (or Ctrl key) changes this button to Clear
5 ‐ 54 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Chooser window The Programmer hardware controls
This button… does this…
F ull Sets the associated parameter to it’s maxim um values. I.E. would set Intensity to 100.
Â
Press Home and Full together to set the parameter to it’s mid value.
Â
Holding the Yellow modifier (or Ctrl key) changes this button to Half
Encoders Rotate to set the associated parameter to the required value.
<- Left arrow Selects the previous Fixture
-> Right arrow Selects the next fixture
Vista User Guide, Version 2 5 ‐ 55
Store All
Working with cuelists
6.
Working
with
cuelists
Once you’ve set up your patch, arranged your fixtures, assigned them and created the presets you want, you’re ready to create a Cuelist . to groups,
This is where the Vista differs in a big way from traditional keypad-controlled lighting consoles, because instead of telling of numbers, you do it all visually, on a large screen using the the hardware controls. it what you want by entering strings pen or mouse and
Vista also offers three ways to start a new Cuelist, you can either:
• Store a c ue directly to one of the playback controls with as few as three button presses. With this method the cuelist is automatically given a name and number and the cue you’ve stored is ready to play. Later you can add more cues to the same cuelist, change fade times and modify other s ettings by opening it in the editor
• Use either of the two Store buttons in the main toolbar to store directly to a playback or to an existing cuelist. Store
Look is easy to use and automatically sets the most po pular options. Store Part provides access to more advanced options.
• Open a new, empty, cuelist in the ed itor and store one or more cues to it. With this method yo you go refining the cue fade times u can store and edit as and every other aspect of the cuelist. After you save the cue list you can switch to the Console window and drag it ont o one of the playback controls.
Vista
is
a
Tracking
Console
Whe n you store a cue this way only the settings that are changing are saved in a cue.
unti
Tha
For exa e e of cu 2 mple, if a fixture is set to 50% Intensity in cue 1 and is not changed l cu 5, there won’t be any In tensity events stored in cues 2-4 for that fixture. t m ans if you change the intensity for that fixture in cue 1 will affect the loo es -4. k
The important difference in a tracking system is that if no level is stored no change will happen.
Store
All
There are several important features of ‘Store All’:
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 1
Store All Working with cuelists
• all the settings that the console is sending to your fixtures are saved. The settings could be coming from the Live tab or any other Cuelist being edited, a playback or any other control on the console.
• Store All does not save settings for fixture features that are at their default. For example if a fixture has 100% intensity, and in colour blue, Store All saves those settings but doesn’t save anything feature of th back it’s possible that another cue will influence what you see.
for Gobo, Position or any other e light. This means that if you play the cue
• when you St ore All the default operation is to append a new cue at th e end of the last cuelist you saved to.
• if you choos
For ex e to store to an existing cue it will be replaced. ample if a have a Cuelist with 10 Cues, Store Look will default to saving to Cue 11. If you choose to save t o
Cue 4 whatever was in that cue will be replaced when you store.
• if you insert a cue before an existing one it’s settings will not change the look you’ve have saved in the existing cue.
This is called ‘ Cue only ’ and means t inserted cue are automatically undon hat any settings in the e in the following cue.
• when you Store All direct immediately take contro from the Live tab will be ly to a Playback it will l of the cue and any setting coming cleared. Because Store All includes all output of the console, this won’t change anything the fixtures are doing – jus coming from. t where the control is
Storing
a
look
in
3
clicks
If you have the Fixture Chooser window open and you are working in the Live tab you’ve probably already selected some lights, given them Intensity, Colour and so on. To create a new Cuelist fast, you do this:
1.
click on the ‘Store All’ button or select the Store All option on the Tools men u. Vista disp lays the Store All window with all the store options preset but just leave everything as is for now.
2 .
Doub le-tap on th are using th e select button of an empty playback on your console. If y e PC version, switch to t he Console window and double click ou one the select button there.
6 ‐ 2 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists Store All
3.
The new Cuelist is ready to use and you can move the fader to bring the level down and back up.
Â
When you Store All this way the console fader is automatically set to be a
Submaster.
Storing
a
look
with
o ptions
W b hen you want to adjust the timing of a cue or give it a new name or number efore storing you use the Store All window. To do this:
1.
click on the ‘Store All’ button or select the StoreAll option on the Tools menu. Vista disp lays the Store All window:
2.
Vista sets the ‘Store to’ cuelist to the cuelist you last saved. If you wan t to store to a new cuelist or another cuelist you’ve already started you can either:
• type a new number, or
• type a few numbers or letters from the name and select the cuelist yo want from the popup window. Vista displa the letters or numbers you type: u ys all the cuelists that include
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 3
Store All Working with cuelists
3.
Vista sets the ‘Store to’ cue to a new cue number at the last saved. If you want to a different cue number number can either:
end of the cuelist you or store over an existing cue
• type a new number or,
• type a few numbers or letters from the name and from the popup window. Vista displays all the select the cue you want
cues that include the letters or numbers you type:
4.
If you want to store to an existing cuelist but aren’t sure of it’s name or number. Cl ick the ‘Open Cuelist’ button. Vista displays the Cuelist and Cues window where you can select from all your saved cuelists:
This option…
All
Recent
Playing
Console
New does this…
Filters the browser to show all the cuelists you’ve recorded
Filters the browser to show just the last few cuelists you’ve stored.
Filters the browser to show just the cuelists that you are playing back.
Filters the browser to show just the cuelists that you are visible on the console – i.e. cuelists that are on the playback pages you can see.
Creates a New cuelist with the next available number.
6 ‐ 4 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists Store All
This option…
Cuelist number field
Search (cuelists) Typing a few letters or numbers in the se the browser to show just the cuelists type. arch box filters that match what you
Select Cue Displays all the cues already stored i n the selected cuelist.
Normally the ‘New Cue’ line will be indicating that you will be storing to a new cue at the end of the cuelist. highlighted
To store over an existing cue highlight the one you want.
Search (cues) does this…
Displays the cuelist numb number in this field. er to save. You can enter a new
Inserts a new cue before the line the icon is on.
Typing a few letters or numbers in the search box filters the browser to show ju type. st the cues that match what you
5.
6.
7 .
click on the i con in the ‘Cue Start Mode’ section to set how the cue will start, the options are:
• Halt - Press t he Go button to play the cue
• Follow - Play ‘n’ seconds after the previou s cue has ended.
• Start - Play ‘n ’ seconds after the previous cue has started.
• Timecode – P the cue when timecode 1 Hour, 2 Minutes, 3 Seconds and 4 Frame received) lay at the specified Timecode ( i.e. 01:02:03:04 would start s is
If you’ve made the cue start mode ‘Follow’ or ‘Start’ enter the time, in seconds, afte r the previous cue has ended or started to start this cue.
S et the fade time s for the cue. To do this you can either:
• set the in and out fade time by ty typing 2/3 s ping in the time box. For example ets the Infade time, for all features to 2 seconds and the outfade time, for Intensity to 3 seconds or,
• c lick on the
For more inf timing drop down and select from the list of preset times.
ormation on Ti ming see page xxx or,
• click on the timing bars and drag th em to the fade times you want or,
• click on the expand icon to reveal the detailed timing panel:
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 5
Store Part Working with cuelists
In the detailed view you can set a fade time, delay time and fade curve for each of the six feature types – Intensity (in and out), Position, Colour, Gobo, Beam and
Miscellaneous channels. To set times either type in the boxes or click on the timing bars and adjust them. To change the fade curve click on the icon and select from the popup list
8.
9.
If you’re are storing to a New Cuelist, you can give it a
Name box title, in the Cuelist
If you’re are storing to a New Cue, you can give it a title, in the Cue Name box.
10.
Click OK to complete the Store Look operation or doub
‘Select’ button to Store the cuelist to that playbac k. le-tap on a playback
11.
Check the buttons for the classes or types of events you want Vista to display.
12.
Type a name for the filter.
13.
Click the ‘Close’ button. Vista adds this filter to the drop-down f ilter list.
Â
Hold down the Yellow modifier (Ctrl on a keyboard) on the console and press the Select button on an empty playback to Store your look and open the cuelist in the Editor window.
St ore
Part
Stor a available with Store Look. ptions, not
If you’ve created information in the Live tab of the Editor (or another cuelist), you can add it or merge it into an existing cuelist, or use it to replace a cue altogether. You can also start a new cuelist using the Store Part method.
6 ‐ 6 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists Store Part
To store this way you do this click on the ‘Store Part’ button or select the Store
P art option on th e To ols menu. Vis ta displays the Store Part window:
Selecting
the Cuelist
to
Store
to
Vista automatically sets the ‘Store to want to store to a new cuelist or either:
’ cuelist to the last cuelist you saved. If you
another cuelist you’ve already started you can
• click on the ‘ cuelist.
New’ button in the cuelist panel to start a new
• tap on a console playback ‘Select’ button to select the
Cuelist on th at playback or,
• click on the Cuelist you want in cuelist panel, which displays all your saved items.
To help find a particular cuelist you can filter using the source and search o ptions:
This option… does this…
All
Recent
Playing
Console
New
Filters the browser to show all the cuelists you’ve recorded
Filters the browser to show just the last few cuelists you’ve stored.
Filters the browser to show just the cuelists that you are playing back.
Filters the browser to show just the cu elists that you are visible on the console – i.e. cuelists th at are on the playback pages you can see.
Creates a New cuelist with the next available number.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 7
Store Part Working with cuelists
This option… does this…
Search (cuelists) Typing a few letters or numbers in the search box filters the browser to show just the cuelists that match what you type.
Selecting
the
Cue
and
store
opt ions
You can add a new cue, or merge to or replace the contents of an existing cue.
When you first open the Store Part window the Cue ‘Add’ button will b automatically. The Merge and Replace options will not be available unless select an existing cue first. e selected
you
1.
If you are adding a new cue you can either accept the cue number Vista suggests or type a number in the Cue Number box or click on one of the insert icons in the list of cues to set the insert location.
- insert cue icon
2.
If you are Merging or Replacing you can either type a number in the Cue
Number box or click on any cue in the cue list panel.
3.
For a new cue enter the cue number and name.
4.
click on the icon in the ‘Cue Start Mode’ section to set how the cue will start, the options are:
• Halt - Press the Go button to play the cue
• Follow - Play ‘n’ seconds after the previous cue has ended.
• Start - Play ‘n’ seconds after the previous cue has started.
• Timecode – Play at the specified Timecode (i.e. 01:02:03:04 would start the cue when timecode 1 Hour, 2 Minutes, 3 Seconds and 4 Frames is received)
5.
If you’ve made the cue start mode ‘Follo seconds, afte w’ or ‘Start’ enter the time, in r the previous cue has ended or started to start this cue.
6.
Select the timing option to apply to the cue, the options are:
• Destination use the timing of the cue you are saving to
• Custom se
7.
Select the fixtures to include when storing:
This option…
All Fixtures does this…
Includes settings for all fixtures with output coming from the Live tab, or any other cue that’s open in the editor [TBC]
6 ‐ 8 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists Opening a Cuelist in the Editor
This option… does this…
Selected Fixtures Only includes fixtures that are selected in the Live tab or cue being edited.
8.
Select the parameters to store using the filter bar. Click on any of the
Intensity, Position, Colour, Gobo, Beam or Miscellaneous icons to mask or un-mask that parameter.
9.
Select the Store Source options.
This option…
Current
Editor tab does this…
Automatically set to ‘Live’ or the Cuelist being edited
All Output Select this button to store all information, from both the editor and any active playbacks.
10.
Select the tracking options
This option… does this…
Cue only Click this checkbox to undo any changes in the following cue. This op tion will not have any effect if you are storing to the last cue.
1 1.
Select the Blocking options.
This option…
No Blocking
Normal Blocking
Super Blocking does this…
The cue is stored normally
Ensures that events that are tracking through to the cue being stored will not be changed even if they are modified in the earlier cue(s ).
Not implemented
Opening
a
Cuelist
in
the
Editor
T n he ‘Store Look’ and ‘Store Part’ methods let you store cues to an existing (or ew) cuelist, without first opening the cuelist in the editor.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 9
The Timeline window Working with cuelists
You can also start a new cuelist from scratch or open an existing one in the editor.
To do this click on the New Cuelist button (normally F2) or select the ‘New
Cuelist option from the Components menu.
Whichever method you choose, Vista creates a new Cuelist tab and displays the
Editor window.
The
Timeline
window
When you select fixtures in the Chooser window and apply intensity, position, colour and other features ‘events’ are created in the Timeline window.
This screen consists of three main elements:
• The Editor control section where you can select to work with the Live editor tab or any Cuelist you have open. If you have a Cuelist open this section expands to include the
Cue navigation controls.
• The Cue navigation section, where you can see all the cues in your cuelist, make selections, add and delete cues, and manage how your edits affect output when you are editing a cue that’s playing back
• The Timeline section where you can view and manipulate the fade times for all the features that are being applied to your fixtures.
6 ‐ 10 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists
Cuelist
tabs
The Timeline window
Live tab – this is the equivalent of want other consoles call the ‘Programmer’ or pe a cuelist or start a new one from scratch, Vista adds a new tab labelled with the c uelist name.
You can have sev l licking on the tab you w t
To close and save a C uelist tab, choose ‘Close Cuelist’ from the Cuelist menu or click the close icon (X) on the cuelist tab.
Â
To save a cuelist at any time select the ‘Save Changes to Cuelist’ option (A lt
+ S) from the Components menu.
Â
When there is information in the Li clear icon is added to the tab. Click ve tab that is affecting the output, a red on it to clear the Live tab output.
Playing
and
moving
aroun d
a
cuelist
At the top of the editor timeline and controls: chooser screens there is a set of player
The buttons work in a similar way to the controls on a C D or DVD player:
This button… does this...
Jumps to the first cue in a cuelist.
Steps backwards to the previous Cue in a cuelist.
Pauses playback.
Starts playback of the next cue in the cuelist.
Steps forwards to the next Cue in a cuelist.
Jumps to the end of last Cue in a cuelist.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 11
The Timeline window Working with cuelists
Cuelist
Navigator
The cuelist navig n es in a cuelist.
Each cue is represe te cues you’ve stored. As you add more cues scrollabar becom n d by a mini cue icon in a scrollbar so you can see all the
more icons are added to the or cues than can fit in the cue tile (or table or layou
scrollbar t) view the es s aded and you can drag the shaded area to show different areas of the cuelist in the list, table and layout views.
The cue scrollbar incl udes buttons to switch the navigator view an d to add or delete cues.
This icon… does this …
Tiles view
Table view
Layout view
Shows the cues as a series of tiles. If there are more cues than can fit in this area the scrollbar highlights the you are viewing and you ca area n drag it to show other cues.
Shows the cues as a table with columns for the cue’s name, number, fade tim e, follow time, blocking status, included features, fixture count and SmartFX
Shows the cues on a timeline. This view is useful if have cues with follow times that mean they overlap other cues.
You can move cues and set follow times by dragging cues on the timeline.
Zooms the layout view to fit all the cues in available space.
Tiles
View
6 ‐ 12 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists The Timeline window
In the ‘Tiles’ view:
• each cue tile shows the number, name, duration and start of cue action
• the cue or cues that are vis ible in the, in the timeline section shows with a green underline
• cues that have played show with a blue fill colour.
• the selected cue shows with a blue outline and with white text. Click on a tab to select it, shift-click or ctrl-click to select a range or group of cues .
You can click on a tile’s start action, cue number, name or duration label and enter a new value. The cue number cannot be changed to a value that would mean changing the order of the cue tiles.
You can right-click on a selected cue or in list to open a pop up enu:
the blank area to the right of the cue
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 13
The Timeline window Working with cuelists
With these options you can:
• open the cue or cuelist properties window
• set the Cue Follow mode (aka selected cue(s)
Cue start action) for the
• block, superblock or unblock the selected cue
• append a cue at the end of the cuelist or insert a new cue before or after the selected cue or at the playhead position.
• delete or renumber the selected cue(s)
• revert (or undo) changes to the selected cue(s)
• change the start time of the selecte d cue(s)
• remove any alias cue links (without deleting any cues or events)
• add an audio file
• cut or copy and paste or paste special (paste with options).the selected cues
• change the appearance of the cue tiles by adding or removing fields
Table
View
In the ‘Table’ view:
• each cue shows as a row in a spreadsheet style view
• the selected cue shows with a blue fill and white text. Click on a row to select a cue, shift-click or ctrl-click to select a range or gro up of cues.
Y ou can double-c lick on a tile’s cue number, name or duration label and enter a n ew va lue. The cue n umber cannot be changed to a value that would mean changing the order of the cue tiles.
L ayout
V iew
6 ‐ 14 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists The Timeline window
In the ‘Layout’ view:
• the cues are laid out end to end, in timeline view. Cues that are set to start before the previous cue finishes overlap and appear on a separate line.
• the selected cue shows with an outline and white text. Click on a row to select a cue, shift-click or ctrl-click to select a range or group of cues.
You can double-click on a tile’s name and enter a new value. To move a cue click and hold while dr agging the cue to the left or right.
Adding
and
deleting
cues
A cuelist c an contain as many cues as you like. To add a new cue at the end of the cuelist you are working on you:
• click on the ‘New cue’ icon at the end of the cuelist scrollbar, or
• choose the ‘Tools > Cue s > Append at end’ option from the
Cuelist menu. then clicking and holding the isting cue by first selecting a cue
‘New cue’ icon until the insert popup appears.
The popup provides option to:
• insert a new cue before the selected cue
• insert a new cue after the selected cue
• append a new cue at the end of the cuelist.
These options are also available on the ‘Tools > Cues submenu on the Cuelist menu.
Deleting
cues
To delete a cue, first select it then:
• click on the scrollbar, or
‘Delete cue’ icon at the end of the cuelist choose the ‘Delete Cue’ option Tools > Cues submenu on the Cuelist menu.
• .
Me rging
cues
Sometimes it’s useful to merge the contents of two or more cues. To do this:
1.
Select the cues with the pen or mouse. Shift-click or ctrl-click to extend the selection.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 15
The Timeline window Working with cuelists
2.
Choose the ‘Merge cues’ option from the Tools > Cues submenu on the
Cuelist menu.
Â
Cues always merge to the lowest cue number.
Moving
an d
copying
cues
Often you’ll have an effect in one of more cues of a cuelist that you’d like to use in another place or another cuelist. You can do this using the cuelist navigator pa el.
To do this:
1.
Select one or more cues by clicking on the cue tiles.
2.
Choose the Copy or Cut option from the Edit menu or right-click on the cue(s) and select Copy cue or Cut cue from the popup menu
3.
Click on the cue before the location you want to move or copy to
Choose the Paste option from the Edit menu or right-cli ck on the cue(s) and select
Paste from the popup menu. The default paste action will restore the look of the copied cue by inserting release events for any features added in the intervening cues. To paste just the events or an alias of the cue, use the ‘paste special’ opt ion.
Â
You can also copy cues by dragging and dropping cue tiles in the cuelist navigator.
Paste
options
If you want to move or copy just the events any other events that occur in previous cues option on the edit menu. in the original cue, without releasing
you can use the ‘paste special’
The cue scrollbar includes buttons to switch the navigator view and to add or delete cues.
This option… does this…
Paste the entire look.
Paste only the events
Restores the look of the original cue by inserting release events for any features added in the intervening cues..
Pastes the events in the original cue, without adding and release events
Alias cue Pastes an alias of the original cue.
6 ‐ 16 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists The Timeline window
Alias
cues
If yo u want to use th update. e same cue, in a cuelist, several times you can make an
‘Alias’. This way if you update any one of the associated alias cues they will all
To create an alias cue
1.
Copy the cue by selecting it and cho osing the copy option from the edit menu.
2.
Navigate to the cue before the position you want the new cue to appear.
3.
Choose the Paste special option from the edit menu. Vista opens the Paste
Special window.
4.
Select the Alias cue option and click OK. Vista pastes an Alias cue after the selected cue.
Alias cue tiles are marked with a small that are aliased to each other in the ‘A
‘Alias’ icon and you can view the cues liased cues’ section of the Cue properties window.
Â
When two or more cues are aliased t and all the other will also change. T o each other any one can be changed here is no ‘master’ cue in an alias set.
Removing
the
link
to
an
Alias
Cue
An Alias cue can be changed to normal cue. To do this:
1.
Select the Cue tile to be changed.
2.
Select the ‘Remove Cue Alias’ option from the edit menu, or, right-click’ on the cue tile ‘ Remove C ue Alias’ option from the popup menu
Making
changes
to
a
cue
without
affecting
the
next
cue
It’s often useful to make ch anges to cue without those changes tracking throug h to the following cue. For example, you might have a cuelist where the lights c
1 hange to colour blue in cu
0. If you then de cide you e 1 and stay that way until they change to red in cue want them to be yellow in just cue 5 you could make that change but since there are no colour events in cue yellow when you really want t s 6-9 the lights will stay hem to revert back to blue in cue 6. t
For this situation Vista pro his: vides a method to make changes to a cue only. To d o
1.
2.
In the timeline select the events – they will normally be highlighted already.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 17
Creating a Move in Black cue Working with cuelists
3 .
Click on the
(cue only)’ o cue to set
‘Untrack’
the lights ba oolbar or select the ‘Un-track events ption from the Tools menu. Vista inserts events in the following were no events of t button on the t ck to the state they were in before the change. If th hat ty pe originally, Vista inserts release events instea ere d.
Blocking
a
cue
Vista is a tracking console, in any cue and that any inf which means that only changed information is stored ormation in a cue tracks forward until it is replaced b a new event or cleared. Som etimes it’s useful to ‘block’ a cue so that any change s y that are subsequently made to previous cues will not affect the final look of the c hosen cue.
To do this:
1 .
Select the cue w ith the events you want to keep exactly as they are. You can select the cue by clicking on the cue t ile or playing the cuelist until you reach it.
2 .
Choose the ‘Bl ock’ but ton on the toolbar (normally Ctrl F9) or select the
‘Block cue ’ option from the Cuelist menu or right-click on the cue tile and select Block from the popup menu. Vista duplicates all tracked information into the selected cue.
Creating
a
Move
in
Black
cue
Sometimes you will want fixtures to move to a position, change to a colour, add a gobo or get set up in some other way while their intensities are at zero. You could do this by programming the necessary events, but you can also do it quickly using the ‘Mark Cue’ option on the Tools menu.
When you create a Mark cue your original programming is preserved and will be restored if you delete the Move in Black (MIB) later.
To Mark a cue and add ‘Move in Black’ events:
1.
Select the cue you want to work with.
6 ‐ 18 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists Creating a Move in Black cue
2.
Choose the ‘Mark Cue’ option on the Tools menu. Vista opens the Move in
Black window:
This screen shows the op tions available; you use it to set the way Vista stores the
Move in Black event:
This option…
Move in Black destination cue
Move in Black destination cue does this…
If the ‘Select can click it t
existing cue’ button is not greyed out you o select any cue, earlier in the Cuelist, for the Move in Black events.
If you prefer to create a new cue for the MIB events select the ‘I nsert a new move in black cue’ option.
If the ‘Select existing cue’ button is not greyed out you can click it to select any cue, earlier in the Cuelist, for the Move in Black events.
If you prefer to create a new cue for the MIB events select the ‘Insert a new move in black cue’ option.
Cue Details – Name Sets the name for the new cue that will be created. The default name is MIB.
Cue Details – Duration Sets the duration for the new cue.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 19
Creating a Move in Black cue Working with cuelists
This option…
Start action does this…
Sets how the MIB cue is started. the options are:
Halt - Press the Go button to play this cue.
Auto Follow - the cue plays automatically after the previous cue.
Finish ith preceding – the cue plays automati cue.
w and is se cally t to finish at the same time as the previous
Disable Move in Black Removes the Move in Black events from the MIB cue but does not delete it.
Marked Features
- Feature filter
Only the selected features will be marked for move in black.
Marked Fixtures Lets you choose to mark all fixtures or just the on es currently selected.
3 .
Click OK to crea te the Move in Black cue:
The move in black events are show n as 'ghosted' events in the Move in Black cue and display the "MIB" icon. Move In Black cues show ‘MIB’ in the tiled cue display and ‘[M]’ in other views.
Marked cues display ‘MARK’ logo in the tiled cue display and ‘[m]’ in other v iews.
Â
Individual ev ent s in a marked cue can also be excluded from move in black.
To do this, select
Ignored e vents s
the events in the tim
In Black’ option from the from th eline view and select the ‘Ignore Move e Timeline’ men how a MIB icon with a red cross u or right-click menu. running through it.
Â
Intensity cannot be marked.
6 ‐ 20 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists Creating a Move in Black cue
C ue
Propert ies
Each cue has a number, name and fade time that you can set by clicking on the c ue tiles and edit ing the fields. You can also set these properties and re the Cue Properties window. other
To do this:
1.
Select the cue yo a
2.
Choose the Cue P p cue tile and select the Cue properties option fro m the popup menu.
Mod ifying
cue
name,
duration,
and
end
of
cue
action
The cue’s name, number and how it starts are set in the properties section of the window:
This option…
Cue name
Cue number does this…
Sets the name that appears in all windows for this cue
Sets the number that appears in all windows for this cue
The cue number cannot be changed to a value that would mean changing the order of the cue tiles.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 21
Creating a Move in Black cue Working with cuelists
This option…
Follow Time
(Cue Start Mode) does this… sets how the cue will start, the options are:
(Halt) Press the Go button to play this cue
(Follow) Play ‘n’ seconds after the previous cue ends
(Start) previous cue.
Play ‘n’ seconds after the start of the
(Timecode) Play when the timecode is received.
Follow time
(Timecode)
Default timing
Ignore Learn
Timing
Sets how lon that this cue g after the start or end of the previous cue starts. This field can only be edited when the cue start mode is set to Follo w, Start or Timecode.
Sets the timing for all events that have not been manually adjusted. The popup window lets you select from the saved timing sets or customise a new one.
Tick this checkbox to ignore this cue when using the
‘Learn Timing’ feature.
Making
a
cue
loop
back
and
repeat
previous
cues
A cue can be set to lo number of times. ‘Lo op back to a previous cue and to repeat the loop an oping’ is set in the loop section of the window : y
This option…
Loop iterations
Loop to cue
Loop tracking does this…
Sets how many times the loop will repeat before the cuelist proceeds normally
Sets the cue that will play next.
Sets whether the events stored in the cues after the ‘Loop to cue’ will tr ack through to the loop cue
6 ‐ 22 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists Creating a Move in Black cue
This option…
Loop direction does this…
Sets the direction of the loop. The options are:
• Forwards - loops from last to first
• Backwards - loops from last to previous.
• Bounce - loops backwards then forwards.
• Random - loops to a random cue between the first and last cue in the loops
Â
Cues that are set to any o
loop don’t play automatically, like a chase. If you want f the cues in a loo p to play without pressing Go you have to set the cue start mode.
A lias
cu es
A lias cue tiles are marked with a small ‘Alias’ icon and you can view the cues that are aliased to each other in the ‘Aliased cues’ section of the Cue properties window:
Tracking
Normally features that are stored in any cue track forward until they are replaced by a new event or cleared. If you only want some events to play in one cue and not track forward you can turn tracking off for one or more cues. To do this open the Blocking / Tracking section of the Cue properties window and tick the ‘Non-
T racking’ checkb ox:
B locking
N ormally only chang ed fea tures are stored in any cue and information tracks forward until it is replaced by a new event or cleared. Sometimes it’s useful to
‘block’ a cue so that any changes that are subsequently made to previous cues will not affect the final look of the c hosen cue.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 23
Creating a Move in Black cue Working with cuelists
To view or modify the blocking for a cue open the ‘Blocking’ section of the Cue properties window:
This option…
None
Blocking
Super Blocking
Block Features
Block Fixtures does this…
The cue is stored normally
Ensures that events th at are tracking through to the cue being stored will not be changed even if they are modified in the earlier cue(s).
Ensures that events th at are tracking through to the cue being stored will not be changed even if other cuelists, that include the same feature types are played prior to this cue being played.
Sets which fe
Intensity, Po ature types are blocked. Click on the sition, Colour, Gobo, Beam and
Miscellaneous icons to turn that feature on or off.
Sets which fixtures are blocked. You can choose either
‘All Fixtures’ or the ones you have selected in the editor.
Free
Effects
mode
In Vista effects can either h ave a ‘basepoint’ or be ‘free’. A Free effect is desi gned to run on top of a feature setting. For example a free circle effect will cause f o ixtures to r setting
move in a circle from the console
around whatever position has been set by another cu
. e
To view or modify the Eve
Cue properties window: nt mode for a cue open the ‘Free effects’ section of t he
This option…
Events provide
Basepoint does this…
Even basel ts in the cue will be u ess effects that are run sed as a base point for any ning.
6 ‐ 24 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists Creating a Move in Black cue
This option…
Events stop Free effects does this…
If the cue includes an event that a baseless effect would act on the effect will be stopped.
Audio
Playback
To add and play an audio file, when the selected cue plays click on the ‘Audio
Playback’ heading to open that section.
This propert y…
Browse does this…
Opens the ‘Select Audio’ window where you can choose an audio file.
Clear Removes the audio file from the cuelist
Â
To add an audio file th window. at plays through all cues use the Cuelist P roperties
Cue
Defaults
If you have a set of Cue pr your ‘Show’ default and th operties that you use frequently you can save them as quickly reset a Cue’s prope ey will be used for all future cues. You can also rties to the fact ory defaults or to your show defaults.
This option…
Reset to show defaults
Reset to factory defaults
Save as show defaults does this…
Reset all cue properties to the se ttings you have saved as t he sh ow defaults (see below).
Reset all cue properties to their standard (factory) settings.
Saves the current cue settings as a default for all new cues.
C uelist
Prope rties
Each cuelist has a with other cuelists. You ca window.
set of properties that control how it plays back and interacts n also set these properties in the Cuelist Prope rties
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 25
Creating a Move in Black cue
To do this:
1.
Open the cuelist in the editor.
2 .
Select the Cue Propert ies option on the Edit menu.
Working with cuelists
This property…
Name
ID
Priority
Play at end option
Ignore Release All
6 ‐ 26 does this…
Sets the name for this cuelist.
Sets the number for this cuelist. This field is not editable.
Sets the priority for the cuelist. A cuelist set to Hi gh pri ority can’t be overridden by normal or low priority cuelists. Only a cuelist set to Programmer priority can o verride the Editor
Determines what happens af ter the last cue is played and fully over-ridden. The options are:
Restart – the Cuelist starts again at the first c ue.
Release – the Cuelist is released.
Ignore – do nothing
The cuelist will ignore the release all command.
Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists Creating a Move in Black cue
This property…
Ignore Snapshots
Release in Black
HTP Enabled does this…
The cuelist will not be affected by a snapshot being loaded.
Releases cuelists when they are no longer contributing to intensity output
Causes the intensities of a cuelist to activate as soon as you move the playback fader from 0.
Fader Type Normally the fader on a playback set will adjust the
Intensity of a cue list. To fade all features (Intensity,
Position, Colour, Gobo, Beam and Custom) in or out with the slider set this property to “All
Features”
Fader Auto Play Sets the fade are: r play and release actions. The options
None – the fader only controls intensity.
Auto Play – raising the fader abov e 0% also plays the cue. (aka ‘Go on fader up’).
Auto Play & Release – raising the fader above 0% also plays the cue. (aka ‘Go on fader up’). Lowering the fader to 0% releases the cue (aka ‘Release on fader dow n’).
Auto Release – lowering the fader to 0% releases the cue (aka ‘Release on fader down’).
Fader Intensity mode Sets the fader precedence and actions.
Normal – the fader is in normal LTP mode.
Submaster – the fader is HTP and will go on fader up and release on down if there is only one cue.
Release on Override Releases a cuelist that is completely over-ridden.
(i.e. is not contributing to the console output.)
Cuelist
Timing
To set timing propert ies click on the ‘Timing’ heading to open that section.
Th is property…
Release Timing
Playback rate % does this…
Sets the fade time when the cuelist is released.
Playback rate for the cuelist. Normally 100%
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 27
Creating a Move in Black cue Working with cuelists
Cuelist
Timecode
To set timecode properties click on the ‘Timecode’ heading to open that section.
This property…
Mode
Armed
Offset does this…
Sets how the cuelist responds to timecode input.
Disabled – timecode is ignored.
Enabled – timecode will be followed if the cuelist is
‘Armed’ (see the next property.
Locked – timecode will always be followed
If the cuelist is set to timecode ‘Enabled’ it will respond to timecode until it is armed. To
not
arm the cuelist either set this property to ‘Armed’ or press the play button on the cuellist.
Add the offset time to the cue trigger times. For example if the offset is 01 trigger time is 00:00:10:00 (10 secs) the cue will go at
01:00:10:00 (1hr 10secs)
:0 0:00:00 (1hr) and a cue
Cuelist
Audio
Playback
To add and play an audio file click on the ‘Audio Playback’ heading to open that sect ion.
This property…
Browse
Clear does this…
Opens the ‘Select Audio’ window where you can cho ose an audio file.
Removes the audio file from the cuelist
Chase
properties
To set a cuelist to chase and adjust the chase properties click on the ‘Chase’ hea ing to open that section.
This property…
Chase Enabled
Chase direction
Chase Tracking does this…
Turns chase mode on or off.
Sets the step order for chases. Can be set to forward, backward, bounce or random.
Turns tracking, within the cuelist on or off. For a chase tracking is normally set to ‘Not Tracking’.
6 ‐ 28 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists
This property…
Ch ase rate
Chase crossfade %
Playback rate BPM
Creating a Move in Black cue does this…
Chase rate when in chase mode, per-minute. expressed as steps-
Proportion of time spent fading vs. time spent at each step of a chase.
Playback rate for the cuelist.
C uelist
proper ty
defa ults
The p roperties you se st t for a cuelist can be used as the default settings for all ne
reset a cuelist to the (factory) standard properties or your w own show defaults. T s ection. o do this click on the ‘Defaults’ heading to open that
This property… does this…
Reset to show defaults Reset all properties to the settings you have saved as the show defaults (see below).
Reset to factory defaults
Reset all properties to their standard (factory) settings.
Save as show defau lts Saves the curre cuelists. nt settings as a default for all new
Cuelist
Notes
You can add notes about a cuelist and these will display in the Playback window.
To do this click on the ‘Notes’ heading to open that section.
T he
Timeline
p anel
The m ain section of t features that you app he timeline is used to control the crossfade time ly to your fixtures. Unlike other consoles where s for all the
you can only see these times as numbers, in Vista you can see everything laid out on a timelines so you know exactly how when changes will occur in relation to each other.
This panel includes:
1.
The default timing section where you set ‘master’ fade times for all feature types (Intensity, Position, Colour, Gobo, Beam, Misc).
2 .
The detai led timing section where you can set individual fade times for every feature being used on your fixtures.
3.
The Filter bar that you use to limit the timeline display to just the fixtures or features or events that you want to work with.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 29
Creating a Move in Black cue Working with cuelists
Default
times
At the top of the timing section there’s a timeline ruler that controls the over all fade times f or all events in a cue – except the ones you explicitly set elsewhere as explained below. When you first open the Timeline (or Chooser) window the r uler wi ll be in it’s collapsed form, as shown here:
The ‘up’ time determines how long it will take for all feature types to fade from their previous value to the value in this cue.
The ‘down’ time is only used for Intensity events where fixtures are fading out
(i.e. getting darker or turning off). It determines how long it will take for
Intensity to fade from their previous value to the value in this cue.
To adjust the up or down fade time click on the on the end point of the bar and when the cursor changes to a double arrow drag to increase or decrease the time:
To set a delay time click on the bar an to move the bar so that it starts after th d when the cursor changes to a hand drag e 0s mark of the cue:
Â
You can also set the up and down f de time by typing in the Timing box. For example typing 3 / 4 sets the Up (or infade) time to 3 seconds and the Down
(or outfade) time to 4 seconds.
To expand the default times ruler, click on the arrow icon.
Expanded
Default
time
view
You can set individual default fade times, delay times and different feature types (Intensity, Position, Colour, Gobo, Be expanded default time view.
fade curves for the am, Misc) in the
To do this:
1.
Click on the expand arrow at the left end of the ruler bar. Vista displays the expanded view:
6 ‐ 30 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists Creating a Move in Black cue
2.
To adjust a feature type fade time click on the on the end point of the bar and when the cursor changes to a double arrow drag to increase or decrease the time. Or type a value in the corresponding ‘Time’ box.
3.
To adjust a feature type delay time click on the bar and when the cursor changes to a hand drag to move the bar so that it starts after the )s mark. Or type a value in the corresponding ‘Delay’ box.
4.
To adjust a feature type fade curve click on the fade icon drop down list
and select from the
This icon…
Linear does this…
Sets the curve to a normal linear fade. The feature fades evenly from the old setting to the new setting over time.
The fade is slower at the start
Damp
The feature goes to the end state very quickly.
Snap start
Snap end
The feature doesn’t change until the very end of the fade time.
Square law
The feature starts with a delay, then slides up to the end state.
Inverse square la
The feature starts quickly and the finishs slowly.
The feature goes to the end state very quickly.
Switch
The feature goes to the end state very quickly.
Hot power
Flourescent
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 31
Creating a Move in Black cue Working with cuelists
This icon… does this…
Sinus
Â
If you make any adjustment the default time for Position, Colour, Gobo,
Beam or Miscellaneous that feature type will no longer be changed when you adjust the ‘Up’ fade time in the condensed timeline ruler.
Saving
and
re
‐
applying
timing
configurations
When you’ve set up a set of default fade times that you like, you can save it so you can apply it to other cues.
Saving
timing
sets
To save a default timing set:
1.
Click on the arrow in the timing drop dow n box:
2.
Click on the ‘Custom Timing’ option. Vista opens the Custom timing window:
3.
Adjust the feature type fade times using the timing bars or by entering values in the time and delay boxes.
4.
Click on the ‘Save as’ button
5.
Enter a name for the timing set in the popup box and click OK.
6.
Click OK to close the Custom Timing window.
6 ‐ 32 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists About the timeline
Applying
saved
timing
configurations
To apply a timing set to a cue:
1.
Select the cue.
2.
Select the timing set you want from the Timing drop-down list.
3.
Vista applies the thing set to the cue. This will not change the timing of any event in the cue that has already adjusted in some way.
Modifying
the
cue
number,
name
and
duration
To change cue name, duration, and end of cue action of a cue, in the tiles or layout view:
1.
Select the cue with the pen or mouse. Shift-click or ctrl-click to extend the selection.
2.
Double click on number, name or duration field. The field switches to edi t mode:
3.
Enter a new value and press Enter on the keyboard.
About
the
timeline
The Vista uses a ‘timeline’ concept that will be familiar to you if you’ve used any modern sound or video editing software on a personal computer. When you store into a cue Vista creates an ‘event’ for each feature of each fixture that you use in the cue. The events are placed, on the timeline, in the cue you working on and when you add more cues they strung together in a cuelist .
The idea is simple: you create a series of lighting ‘events’ that occur in sequence when you hit the ‘Play’ button. With the Vi sta you can move back and forth through this piece of time and edit any aspect of the events that occur, in much the same way as you could drag a tape back and forth across the play head analogue tape deck.
of an
Events
on
the
Timeline
The default timing section lets you set the timing for all the fixtures in a cue but when you want to make timing changes for individual fixtures or events you work in the timeline panel. When you select a fixture, in the editor and set
Intnsity, Colour or any other feature Vista creates a horizontal ‘event’ bar on the timeline. These are the commands Vista is sending to your fixtures.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 33
About the timeline Working with cuelists
The event bars represent the activities of those fixtures over time. As you can see in this example, the bars go from the ‘0s’ point on the timeline scale to the ‘2s’ point. This means that these fixtures are moving to a new setting over two seconds:
The settings you’ve applied to these fixtures on the palettes (e.g. intensity, colour and position) control the fixtures themselves. The timeline simply tells those fixtures to accept those comma nds, and the event bar represents the length of time it will take those fixtures to get to the desired state.
Once the fixtures get to that state they will stay like that until they receive another command telling them to do so colour or fade out). mething else (e.g. change to another
By placing the event bars where you want them on the timeline you’re giving commands to those fixtures that tell them in. The parameter is determined by the palettes; the ti starts and ends.
how long a parameter will take to fade meline only controls when the fade
Using
the
summary
views
You can view the events on the timeline in several ways:
• summarised by feature, i.e. inten sity, position and colour
• summarised by fixture type
• filtered by feature type (Inten sity, Position, Colour etc) or
Fixture type
• filtered by fixture selection
• filtered by fade path, event type and event timing
Y e s ou choose these nd of the rul etting of eac
vie er bar. Y h summ ws from the F ilter view drop-down menu at the left hand ou can also switch between the m ary view using the + and – buttons inimised/maximized
beside the feature or fixture names in the left column.
6 ‐ 34 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists
Summary
by
feature
This view shows a set of fixtures by their attributes:
About the timeline t
By default, t he details he view sho
, click the ‘ ws each bar minimised. To expand each attribute and se e
+’ symbol beside the attribute name (e.g. ‘colour’). Vist a displays the details o f that attribute:
Summary
by
fixtures
The fixture type view shows the same information but sorted by fixture rather t han attribute:
The default fixture view has all the features minimised. To expand each fixture bar and see the details, click the ‘+’ symbol beside the fixture you want to see.
Vista displays the details of that attribute:
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 35
About the timeline Working with cuelists
Filtering
the
All
Events
view
As well as displaying the Feature and Fixture views, you can also choose to filter out different classes of information on the timeline. To do this, choose an option from the list below the line in the View drop-down menu:
When you choose a filter, Vista displays only those types of events.
You can create your own filters to show want to see. To create a filter: only those combinations of events you
1.
Choose the ‘Custom View Filter’ option from the menu. Vista displays the
Custom Filter window:
With this window you can filter by fixtures, event features and advanced options:
This option… does this…
Shows fixtures in the left column View Type
Fixtures
View Type
Features
All
Shows feature types in the left column
Filters the timeline to show All fixtures
6 ‐ 36 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists About the timeline
This option…
Selected Fixtures
In the Current cue
With New
Programming
Groups
Event Types
Fade Path does this…
Filters the timeline to show only selected in the Chooser window
the fixtures that are
Filters the timeline to show only the fixtures that have programming in the current cue.
Filters the timeline to show only fixtures that hav have been edited since the cue was last saved. e new
Shows just the fixtures, in the groups that are ticked.
This filter is applied after the other Fixture filters.
Filters the timeline to show only the feature types that are tick ed. Click on the ‘+’ sign beside a feature type to select just a subset of that feature.
Filters the timeline to show only events that are (or are not) set to a particlular fade path (i.e. Linear, Snap, etc)
Event type Filters the timeline to show only events that are (or are not) a particl
Black, etc) ular type (i.e. Preset, Release, Move in
Event Timing Filters the timeline to show only event not) set to: s that are (or are
• Follow the default times
• A Zero fade time
2.
Click on the ‘Save As’ button. Vista shows the ‘Save As’ window
3.
Type a name for the filter.
4.
Click the ‘OK’ button. Vista adds thi s filter to the drop-down filter list.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 37
About the timeline Working with cuelists
Managing
your
saved
Filters
You can rename, p Manage
View Filters’ option fr
Filters window: om the Filter drop down list. Vi sta opens the Manage View
To modify one of the built in filters or a custo m sort you’ve saved:
1.
Select the Filter n ame in the left-hand panel.
2.
Modify the View type, Fixture selection, Event types and advanced event options.
3.
Click the ‘Save’ b utton.
Renaming
a
Filter
You can rename a rt by double clicking on the name, in the left column, and typing a new name.
Duplicating
a
Filter
To make a copy of a filter, select it and click on the ‘Duplicate’ button.
Deleting
a
Filter
To delete a filter, select it and click on the ‘Delete’ button.
One
click
filters
At the bottom of the timeline screen there is a set of filter buttons that provide quick access to four popular filters.
This icon… does this…
6 ‐ 38 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists
This icon… does this…
Shows all fixtures in the cuelist
All
Shows just the selected fixtures.
Selected
Cue
About the timeline
Shows the fixtures in the current cue. Useful for removing ‘white space’ in the timeline
Shows just the fixtures with new programming.
New
Zoo ming
in
and
ou t
At the bottom of the timeline screen there is a set of zoom buttons that let you
This icon… does this…
Zoom out to show more of the cuelist
All
Selected
Zoom in to show more detail
Cue
Zoom to sho w a single cue
Zoom out to show all cues in the cuelist
New
Zoom to show the selected cue(s)
Auto Toggles auto zoom on or off. This means that whatever cu e is elected is automatically zoomed to fit the window.
Â
The zoom op n ble on the View menu.
The
Editor
Status
bar
Below the cuelist navigator there ’s a status bar that shows details about the cuelist you are working on and the cue that’s being edited and played:
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 39
Timeline events Working with cuelists
In the status bar the three fields show:
• the Cuelist that is open in the editor, this field will correspond to the selected tab.
• the Cue that is the cue that yo being edited, this field will correspond to u have selected in the Cue navigator bar.
• the cue, in the cuelist you are working on, that is playing and contributing to the console’s output.
The buttons on the status bar control how the editor interacts with the console’s output and playback:
This button… does this...
Link joins the editor and and any playback (of the cue being edited) to the cue you're editing.
This means that when you select a cue, in the editor it will play. Likewise if you play a cue, from the cuelist being edited it will change the cue selection in the editor.
If you want to edit a cue without seeing it on stage ‘Link’ should be de-selected.
When you turn Link off and select a cue an alert appears in the status bar to inform you that you are: “Not editing the stage cu e”
Clicking on ‘Sync’ sets the cue showing in the editor to match the cue being played. Then, as you play other cues the editor will automat ically follow the cue that’s playing.
However if you select a different cue, in the editor, playback will not be affected and Sync will automatically turn off. This means you can make a change to an upcoming cue without changing the look on stage then click Sync again to bring the editor in line with the playback.
The
progress
indicator
When you hit Play, the blue line starts moving from left to right across the eve bars in the ti nt meline panel. This line shows where you are up to in this cue. If you hit Pause, the line stops wherever it is on the timeline; if you hit Play it starts from the same spot.
Timeline
events
You can create an y number of cuelists, each of which can consist of any nu mber of individual lighting events. You can th them interactivel en combine these cuelists and ‘play’ y to produce your overall lightshow.
6 ‐ 40 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists Timeline events
Adding
events
to
the
timeline
Whenever you store a cue, using ‘Store Look’ or ‘Store Part’ you create events on the Cuelist’s timeline. To work with those events and make timing adjustments you open the cuelist in the editor and select the ‘Timeline’ window.
You can als o create a new Cuelist, from scratch, in the editor and work with the events straight away. To do this:
1.
Click the ‘New’ cuelist icon or select the ‘New’ option on the Cuelist menu.
2.
Select the icon on the main toolbar to display the Fixture Chooser window.
3.
Choose the fixtures you want (or select a group of fixtures by clicking on o of the Group icons). ne
4.
On the Intensity palette, turn up their intensity to a level above zero. You ca n also set any of the other features, such as position and colour on the other palettes if you like.
5.
Select the Timeline icon on the main toolbar at the top of the screen. Vista displays the timeline window with the features you used shown in the l column and the timing events for those features to the right. eft
About
the
Event
bars
The timeline event bars are labelled and include graphics to identify their function and edit status.
Feature
summary
event
Feature events are coloured to indicate their type (Intensity, Position, Colour,
Gobo, Beam or Miscellaneous).
The event label shows:
• the number of fixtures the event applies to
• the fade time.
Feature
detail
event
You can open a feature summary event by clicking on the ‘+’ button, beside the feature name in the left column .
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 41
Timeline events Working with cuelists
The event label shows:
• the event sett ing. In the example above the event shows the
CMY settings and include icons. an icon of the colour. Not all event types
• the fade time.
Snap
events
Events that are set to a zero second (0s) an arrow at the left end:
fade time are shaped like a banner with
When you select a snap event there is only one selection handle (the aqua coloured square). When you click on the handle you can drag in either direction and once the event has a length a second handle will appear.
C hanged
events
Events that you’ve edited, since the cue was last saved, show with a hatched pattern:
Moving
events
around
Each event has three attributes: a start point, duration and a finish point. The event bars on the tim how long it will take eline show you where each event starts and finishes and to reach its end point:
To adjust the start or end point of an event, select the event and drag it along the timeline to the left or right. No te that the grid has an automatic ‘snap-to’ feature that makes it easy to align start and end points.
To change the duration of an event, click on it and select the ‘handle’ (aqua square) on the right-hand end and drag it left to shorten the event, or right to lengthen it.
Note that in the example shown above three separate attributes of the event have different timings:
• the Intensity event starts at 0s and is com plete at 2s
• the Position event starts at 0s and is complete by 1s
• the Colour event starts at 0s and is complete at 1.5s
• the Beam event starts at 0s and is complete at 1.75s.
6 ‐ 42 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists Timeline events
Working
with
selection
handles
A quick and easy way to create dynamic lighting effects is to ‘skew’ the events on the timeline. When you select a group of events, Vista displays a selection box around them with aqua /black squares
‘handles’: on the corners and sides known as
You use these handles to change the duration of the selected events. In this example, the Intensity events of a set of fixtures handle and dragging it you can change the start are selected. By selecting a
or finish point of the selected events. In the example above the fixtures will fade in over 1s
In the next example, we’ve selected the middle handle on t he lower edge of the selection and dragged it right to fade the events start and end fade times while retaining the 1 seco fixtures: over 2 seconds, offsetting the nd fade time for the individual
Using the selection h the selected events w andles in this way you can utterly transform the attribute s of ith just a few quick clicks. You can also adjust any of the intensity, colour and beam attributes at any time while adjusting the timeline events.
Making
precise
timing
adjustments
If you want to set the start and end point on the timeline times and durations of events to
you can either zoom right in and line them up v a precise isually, or enter the act ual time values.
Using
the
set
timing
window
You can set event timing and optionally scale events using the ‘Event timing’ window. To do this select the event(s) and select ‘Set Event Timing’ option from the Timeline menu. You can also right-click option from the popu p menu. on select the event(s) and select this
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 43
Timeline events
V ista displays this sc reen:
Working with cuelists
This option…
Start
Middle d oes this…
Select to set the start time of an event
Select to set the mid point of an event
End Select to set the end time of an event.
TIme
Start / Mid / End
Enter a time to set the start mid or end of an event to that position on the timeline. If you enter a number with no units Vista assumes seconds. Use h for hours, m for minutes, e.g. 1h2m3.5s
Duration
Scale Events
Enter a time to set the duration (or length) of an event(s). If you enter a number with no units Vista assumes seconds.
Use h for hours, m for minutes, e.g. 1m2s.
Select scaled
this option if you want all selected events to be
when the duration is increased or decreased.
Scaling is based on the longest event. If this box is not ticked all events will be set to the same duration
Aligning
start
and
end
points
You can also align the start and end times of selected events. To do this, select the events and then select the ‘Align Start’ or ‘Align End’ option from the Timeline menu.
You can also right-click on select the event(s) and select these options from the popup menu.
Resetting
e vents
to
follow
the
default
times
When you adjust the time of an individual event it no longer follows the cue’s
‘default times’. To reset an event so that it follows the default, select the event and choose the ‘Reset to default timing’ option from the Timeline menu.
6 ‐ 44 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists Timeline events
You can also right-click on select the event(s) and select these options from the popup menu.
Setting
the
event
fade
curve
Vista automatically selects the most suitable fade curve for each feature type but you can choose from a set of pre-defined fade path shapes to set how an event will progress.
Select the ‘Fade Curves’ option from the Timeline menu or right-click on the event(s) and choose the Fade Curves option to display the fade path options:
The shapes in this menu depict the fade paths you can choose:
This icon… does this…
Sets the curve to a normal linear fade. The feature fades eve nly from the old setting to the new setting over time.
Linear
Damp
The feature goes to the end state very quickly.
Snap st art
The feature doesn’t change until the very end of the fade time.
Snap end
The feature starts with a delay, the state. n slides up to the end
Square law
The feature starts quickly and the finishs slowly.
Inverse square
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 45
Timeline events Working with cuelists
This icon… does this…
The feature goes to the end state very quickly.
Switch
The feature goes to the end state very quickly.
Hot power
Flourescent
Sinus
Â
Instead of making an event very short, you can just set it to Snap at Start.
Creating
Release
events
Sometimes it’s useful to have a cue release contro l of a feature. For example a cuelist might set some lights to point downstage in the first c cue you want the lights to revert to whatever position they
To do this you need to store a ‘Release’ event(s) fo want to the cue to relinquish control of. ue but in the second were in previously. r the fixtures and features you
You can also right-click on select the event(s) and select the se options from the popup menu.
Un
‐
tracking
events
You can also right-click on select the event(s) and select the p opup menu. se options from the
Muting
events
I f you want to te mpo
‘mute’ it. To do this sele t he Events menu. Th rarily preven t an event from being played back you can ct the event( s) and choose the ‘Mute event option from e event bar will be greyed and when the cue is played the e vent will be ignore d .
To un-mute an event choose the ‘Unmute’ event option from the Events menu.
Y ou can also right-cli popup menu. ck on select the event(s) and select these options from the
6 ‐ 46 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists Creating and applying extracts
Stopping
effects
overriding
an
event
‘Baseless’ effects are designed to run on top of a feature setting. For example a b aseless c ircle effect w position is been set in ill cause fixtures to move in a circle around whatever
a cue. If you want to stop a baseless effe event, right click on the event and ct running on an select the ‘Stop free effects’ option.
Creating
an d
applying
extracts
Extracts are like prog y s ou define on the tore the timing a
pal ssoc ramming templates and can contain any of ettes: intensity, colour, beam, positio iated with the events.
the attributes n, and so on. They also
A on a pply in other cuelist can save yourself a lo n save and res. By re-using existing material to build new cuelists yo t of time re-creating your favourite lighting effects. u
E xtracts
Extracts are like progra y mming tem plates and can contain any of the attributes ou define on the palettes: intensity, colour, beam, position, and so on. They also store the timing associated with the events.
An app extract is a section of a cuelist (or range of events) that you can save and rely in other cuelists. By re-using existing material to build new cuelists you can save yourself a lot of time re-creating your favourite lighting effects.
Cre ating
extracts
1.
Select the part of the cuelist or events on the timeline that you want to use an extr act. as
2.
To adjust a slider setting, either:
• Select the Extracts button on the Components tab, in the sidebar. Then click on the + button or
• click on the ‘New Extract button – normally Alt-F8.
3.
Type a name for the extract and click the OK button.
4.
Vista adds the new item to the extract list.
Applying
extracts
To apply an extract:
5.
Select one or more fixtures in the Fixture chooser window.
6.
Click the Extracts button on the Components tab of the sidebar.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 47
Using commands within cuelists Working with cuelists
7.
Find the extract you want and click on it to select it.
Set the mask butto that is masked, ev ns so that the attributes you want are applied. Any attribute en if it is part of the extract, will not be applied.
Using
commands
within
cuelists
Commands let you use a Cuelist to control the playback of one or more other cuel ists.
To insert commands within a cuelist:
1.
Open a cuelist in the programmer and choose the Insert Commands... option from the Tools me nu. Vista opens the Insert Command window:
2.
Select the command to insert from the Action column:
This option… does this…
Play, Back, Pause,
Assert, Skip Fwd,
Skip Back,
Release,
Acts on the cuelist as if you had pressed the corresponding button on the playback controls for that cuelist.
Flash Equivalent to pressing the flash button on a cuelist’s playback controls. You must also enter either ‘on’ to flash or ‘’off’ to flash in the Parameter box.
6 ‐ 48 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists Using commands within cuelists
This option…
Inh ibit
Rate does this…
Inhibits (b linds) or un-inhibits the cuelist. You must enter either ‘on’ or ‘off’ in the Parameter box.
The Parameter field is a text field and only allows valid input (e.g. numerical BPM value).
Releases All active cuelists. No other options are available when this command is selected.
Timecode reset Resets the timecode to 00:00:00:00.
Timecode enable Sets a cuelist to be activated by Timecode.
Jum p
Snapshot
Allows you to Jump to a sp ecific cue within a cuelist.
Activates the snapshot selected in the parameter field.
Release others Releases all active cuelists except the one containing this command.
3.
Select the Cuelist to be triggered from the Cuelist column or click on the
‘Browse’ button to open the mini components window. Open this window to select a cuelist, from the components window cuelists layout, and click OK.
4.
Enter an on or off command or cue number, if applicable, in the Parameter field. You can also click on a spot in the timeline ruler and tick the ‘Insert at cursor’ box to put the command at that position.
5.
The command will normally be placed in the cuelist at the current playhead position. If you want to put it at a different position enter a time in the At field.
6.
Enter a descriptive label in the Label/Description field if required. This text will appear alongside the command, in the timeline.
7.
Normally Vista creates a new end cue if you place the command beyond the end of the cuelist. If you prefer to extend the last cue of the cuelist tick the
'Expand existing cue' checkbox.
8.
Click ‘Insert’ to insert the command and close the window.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 49
Updating Presets and Cuelists during playback Working with cuelists
Updating
Presets
and
Cuelists
during
playback
When you make changes in the Programmer Live tab while a cuelist is being played back, you can make those changes apply to the presets from which you constructed the cuelist, or just make the changes to the cuelist itself.
Â
Update is designed to change settings that are already in a Cuelist and does not automatically add new events or fixtures to a Cuelist, but you can open a
Cuelist and add new information in the programmer window on the Update window.
Existing
information
To update existing information:
1.
While a cuelist is playing, go to the Live tab in the Programmer window and select the fixtures you want to change.
2.
Make the adjustments you want using the palettes or hardware controls.
3.
Click the Update icon menu.
, or choose the Update option from the Tools
4.
Vista displays the Update window:
Here you can choose whether to apply the changes to Cuelists or Presets if they are in use. You can also filter the changes by fixtures and parameter. By default,
Vista selects the presets.
6 ‐ 50 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Working with cuelists Updating Presets and Cuelists during playback
5.
To make the changes to all Fixtures in the Cuelist or Preset, click the ‘All fixtures’ button. To make th
‘Selected fixtures’ button. e changes to just the selected fixtures click
6.
You can use the parameter filter icons to select or de-select the features you want to include in the preset - Intensity, Position, Colour, Gobo, Beam and
Misc. For more info page 5-45. rmation about the parameter filter bar refer to Presets on
7.
To apply the an s in the Presets n
Cuelists pane to a presets.
pa e or, click the checkboxes beside the cuelist names in the pply the changes to one or more cuelist rather than to the
8.
When you’ve def button to ret ined how you want to apply your changes, click the OK urn o the Programmer screen.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 6 ‐ 51
Effect types
SmartFX
7.
SmartFX
Effect
types
Vista provides several effect types:
• Wave effects where Intensity or Colour or Position or any other feature of your lights fo sort of effect you can create In llows a waveform. With this tensity chases, Position shapes such as a circle and Colour mix effects including rainbows and more.
• Swing effects where Intensity or other feature of your lights crossfad other IPCGBM settings.
Colour or Position or any e between presets or
• Video effects that use an animated gif to control the
Intensity and Colour of a group of fi xtures – usually arranged in a matrix.
Using
effects
To run an effect on your fixtures you can either:
• apply one of V ista’s built in template effect or
• modify a template effect or
• create your own effects from scratch, using the SmartFX win dow.
Applying
a
stored
t m
effect
To apply an effect:
1.
In the Fixture Choose r window, select the fixtures you want to use.
2.
Click the Components tab in the sidebar and select the FX button. Vista ail ble template effects:
Vista User Guide, Version 2 7 ‐ 1
Using effects SmartFX
The icon indicate s th effect type and letters in the ‘Content’ column show which s e ect:
This icon / letter…
I
P indicates this…
An Intensity effect .
A Position effect.
C
Matrix
Multi-element
Multi-feature
(i.e. IPC---)
/
A Colour effect.
An effect designed to run on a matrix (See creating a matrix on page [TBC]) or multi-element fixture (a fixture with more th an one light source – for example a 4 cell ColourBlock.
An effect that includes more than o example the ‘BallyColour’ effect . ne feature. For
Â
If a template effect is greyed out it means that the template cannot be applied to the fixtu re type(s) you have selected.
3 .
To apply an effect, click r unning on the select on the one you want. The effect you’ve chosen starts ed fixtures.
4 .
To adjust the s peed a nd other settings of an effect, open the SmartFX window and use the controls to adjust it. See the following section
Using
the
SmartFX
window
to
modify
an
effect
To adjust the speed and o by either: ther parameters of an effect, open the SmartFX wi ndow
• clic king the Sm artFX button on the main toolbar – usually
F11, or
• selecting the SmartFX Editor option from the Tools menu
(Ctrl + K).
7 ‐ 2 Vista User Guide, Version 2
SmartFX Using effects
The SmartFX has two panes: the effects list, on the left and effect controls on the right:
The ‘Show effects from…’ pane normally shows the effects that are active (i.e. running in the Live tab or in a Cuelist).
The
Effects
list
You can filte r the list of effects by their source, whether they are active and the fixtures they are being ap plied to.
This option…
Source
Popup selector
Active only
Selected Fixtures
New Effect does this…
The source popup filters the effects list by source:
• Anywhere includes all effects
• Selected Cuelist includes just the effe on the Selected Playback cts running
• Editor Cuelist includes effects running in the
Live tab and any Cuelists (tabs) that are open in the Editor
• Editor Current Cue includes effects running in the selected cue in the Cuelist being edited.
Filters the effects list to only show effects that are being played – that is the ones you can see on s tage.
Filters the effects list to only show effects that are being run on the selected fixtures.
Creates a new effect with your own settings. See
Creating an effect from scratch on page 7-12
Vista User Guide, Version 2 7 ‐ 3
Effect controls SmartFX
This option…
Save as template does this…
Click this button to save the effect as a template th at will appear in the Components list and Quickpickers.
W hen you click on an effe ct in this list, Vista displays the settings and co for this effect in the right hand pane. ntrols
Effect
controls
The SmartFX Control Panel co ntains:
• Rate c ontrols that apply to all feature types in your e ffect.
• Feature type tab(s) (IPCGBM) with co ntrols for the effect waveform, size, rate multiplier, and direction
• A S equence tab with controls for fixture overlap, sorting, spr ead and ganging.
• An Advanced tab, where you can add additional eff and also
synchronise or offset the effect waveforms. T
used to set how the effect interacts wi ects his tab is th other cues and effe cts during playback
Rate
control
Effects can include one or more feature types (IPCGBG). The rate controls apply and are common to all fe tures in the effect.
This option…
Rate BPM
Rate popup:
• per cycle
• per item
(was per-fixture)
Disable / Enable does this…
Sets the base rate at which the effect runs, expressed in beats-per-minute (BPM).
This control affects whe ther the Rate is based on cycles-per-minute or fixtures-per-minute:
Per-cycle - if the effect is an intensity chase at a Rate of 20 BPM Per-c ycle, then the whole sequence will repeat 20 times each minute.
Per-item - if the chase is at a Rate of 80BPM Per-item, then the chase will cover 80 fixtures each minute. The loop time of a Per-item effect varies with the quantity of fixtures used, and is slower with more fixtures.
This means the fixture-to-fixture rate (e.g. a flash rate) will be constant no matter now many fixtures are used.
This button disables or enables the selected effect.
7 ‐ 4 Vista User Guide, Version 2
SmartFX Effect controls
T he
Feature
tab (s)
for
‘W ave’
effects
Effects can include one or more feature types (IPCGBG). Vista creates a feature tab for each type with con direction. trols for the effect waveform, size, rate multiplier, an d
Click on the feature tab (i .e. Intensity) to see t he controls:
Â
The feat ure tab(s) wi ll not appear unless the effect is selected in the left pan e.
This option…
Size
(was Amplitude) does this…
Size affects how much of the effect waveform is added to the feature. For example if you run an
Intensity wave effect, set intensity.
to size 50%, on a set of fixtures they will modulate between 0 and 50%
For effects that run on more than one channel (i.e.
Position and Colour mix) there is a separate size control for each channel
For swing effects there is no size controls since only a value of 100% will reach the endpoints.
Rate
(was Rate Multiplier)
Direction
To maintain synchronization between the features of an effect you can scale the rate for each feature as a multiple of the base rate.
To make a feature run slower than the base rate set the feature rate to lower value (e.g. x½ or x¼ ).To make a feature run faster than the base rate set the feature rate to a higher value (e.g. x2 or x4 )
Mainly useful for chasing effects, this controls whether fixtures are sequenced in ascending
(forward), descending (backward) or both directions
(bounce).
Vista User Guide, Version 2 7 ‐ 5
Effect controls SmartFX
This option…
Base tab
Waveform buttons
Base tab
Visual editor
Customise tab does this…
This tab shows the available effect waveforms, in graphical form. To select a waveform click on one of the buttons.
When multiple waveforms are being used the buttons show the effect that will be created. For example
• Position – shows buttons for creating shapes including a Circle, Square, Can-can, Triangle,
Figure 8, Spiral, Bally Hoo and Spread circle.
• Colour Mix – shows buttons for a Rainbow wave, RGB, CMY and more
Below the waveform buttons, Vista displays a preview of the waveform(s) in the effect. For position and colour effects this section also provides size controls for each of the feature waveforms. For example a position effect has one waveform operating on Pan and another on Tilt.
You can change the offset of the waveform(s) by clicking in the preview window and dragging the waveform to the left or right.
On this tab you can select the waveform type and the phase offset of the waveform. For position and colour effects, tha there is also t operate on more than one channel a waveform, rate multiplier and phase offset control for each channel.
The
Feature
tab(s)
for
‘Swing’
effects
For swing effects there are n o size controls since only a value of 100% will reach re is no direction control because ‘swing’ effec designed to bounce between endpo ints. ts are
7 ‐ 6 Vista User Guide, Version 2
SmartFX Effect controls
Â
The feature tab(s) will not appear unless the effect is selected in the left pane.
This opt ion…
Stop
Beats
Feature
Value
Curve
Run effect does this…
Clicking on a ‘Stop’ icon pauses the swing effect so that you can set a value for the feature. To set a value choose a preset or set a value in the sidebar palette win dows.
Sets the number of beats the effect will remain on each point before fading to the next point. shows the type of features included in the swing points shows a value or graphical representation of the setting for the swing point.
Sets the fade curve to the swing point. See ‘F curves’ on page xxx ade
Click the ‘Run effect’ button to start the swing effect running if it has been stopped.
Click the + (Plus) button to add a swing point.
Click the - (Minus) button to delete the selected swing point.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 7 ‐ 7
Effect controls SmartFX
The
Sequence
tab
When you apply an effect to a number of fixtures you can use the controls on the sequence tab to set how the effect is applied to those fixtures.
This option…
Overlap does this… affects how much each fixture overlaps the next when the effect is running:
• At 0% each fixture runs the effect sequent there is no overlap ially –
• At 100% e ach fixture executes the effect simultaneously.
This control w orks in conjunction with Spread to achieve synchronized chases & wave effects.
7 ‐ 8 Vista User Guide, Version 2
SmartFX
This option…
Spread
Sort Fixtures
Spread Shape
Curve
Effect controls does this…
Vista dyna value for ea mically calculates a waveform offset ch fixture depending upon this control:
• Spread = 0% - all fixtures have a uniform offset
• Spread = 100% each fixture has a unique offset ranging from 0% to 100%.
Normally this control will be left at 100% unless the
Overlap con periods when all fixtures will appear to be doing nothing. trol is at 100%, otherwise there will be
See below for a simple SmartFX tutorial using
Overlap & Spread. when an effect runs you can sort the fixtures in a number of ways:
• ID sorts the fixtures by number order.
• Selection sorts based on the order in which you selected them in the Chooser.
• Random sorts the fixtures in a random order.
• Position sorts the fixtures by their position on the Fixture Chooser layout. Fixtures are sorted from top left to bottom right.
To reverse the sort order click on the drop dow n box and choose either ‘Ascending’ or ‘Descending ’ the spread shape buttons control how the effect runs across the fixtures. There are 4 spread shap available: es
• Fir st to last. The effect starts on the first fixture and runs to the last.
• Pairs, outside to inside. The effect starts on the
2 end fixtures and into the centre.
• Last to first. The opposite of 1.
• Pairs, inside to outside. The opposite of 3. sets the distribution of fixtures, along the effect waveform. The normal setting is ‘Linear’and in this case the fi xtures are evenly distributed. Other curves, such as square and inverse square will bunch some of the fixtures together and spread others out.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 7 ‐ 9
Effect controls SmartFX
This option…
Fixture Ganging
Blocking
Fixture Ganging
Repeats does this… sets how the set of fixtures are grouped together.
‘No Blocking’ indicates tha t the effect runs across the fixtures one at a time.
Fixtures can be ganged so that two or more fixtures are doing the same thing. For example:
• when set to 2, adjacent pairs of fixture ganged together in the effect. s are
• when set to 2/1/3 for a set of 12 fixtures they’d be ganged in a pair, then a single, then threes. allows non-adjacent fixtures to be ganged together.
• a repeat of 2 sets every third fixture to be doing the same thing.
• a repeat of 3 sets every fourth fixture to be doing the same thing.
The ‘Preview’ panel shows how the fixtures will be ganged together. click this button to
[TBC]
Change Fixture
Selection
The
Advanced
tab
This tab is used to:
• synchronise or offset the effect waveforms when there is more than one feature in an effect – for example an effect that includes both Intensity and Colour features.
• set how the effect interacts with other cues and effects during playback
• sa ve an effect you’ve modified or created to the list of template effects.
7 ‐ 10 Vista User Guide, Version 2
SmartFX Effect controls
This option…
(Ph ase offset)
+ Add
- Delete
Basepoint
- Bound
- Free does this… adjusting the Offset value, rolls the waveshape within its own window. For example a 0% Phase offset for a sine waveform would start and end at the midpoint while a 25% Phase offset would have the sinusoid start & end at the high point.
You can adjust the offset of a feature by either dragging in the waveform window value betw or entering a een 0 and 360 in the offset field
Click the + icon to add a new effect type that is synchronised with the other features(s) in this effect.
Click the - icon to delete the selected effect feature. sets what happens when fixtures that are running an effect receive a new setting for the same feature type. For example if a circle position effect is running on a set of fixture and a cue runs that sets those fixtures to a different position.
If the basepoint is set to Bound the effect s tops running.
If the basepoint is set to Free the effect continues to run bu t will take it’s basepoint from the new event.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 7 ‐ 11
Creating an effect from scratch SmartFX
This option… does this… sets what happens as this effect star effect is already running. ts when another
Auto-sy nc the effect starts on the same phase as the already running effect
Restart the e ffect always starts at it’s 0 point and so will always look the same when it starts.
No-sync . [TBC]
Cr eating
an
effect
from
scratch
To create your own effect:
1.
In the Programmer Fixture window , select the fixtures you want.
2.
Click the SmartFX button on the option from the Windows
main toolbar or choose the ‘SmartFX Editor’ menu. Vista displays the Smart Effects window.
3.
Click the New button, at the bottom of the left pane, to display the Create
Effect window:
4.
Click on one of the effect type buttons. Vista provides several effect types:
• Wave effects where the setting for Intensity or Co other feature follows a waveform. lour or Position or any
• Swing effects that that move between two or more presets or IPCGBM settings
• Video effects that use an animated gif to control the Intensity and
Colour of a group of fixtures – usually arranged in a matrix.
5.
Choose the Feature type you want to use in the effect (e.g. intensity, or position or colour)
6.
‘Type a name for your effect in the ‘Name’ box
7.
Click OK display your effect in the SmartFX window:
8.
Adjust the controls in the right hand panel of the window to apply the effects you want.
Making
your
effect
swing
If you chose the ‘Swing’ button in the Create effect window, you have to define the end points of the effect (i.e. where it starts and where it finishes).
7 ‐ 12 Vista User Guide, Version 2
SmartFX Stopping an effect
In this case, when you click OK, Vista adds two swing point in the feature tab of the SmartFX window.
T
1.
Click the first ‘Stop’ button.
2.
Use either the palettes or the controls to set a value for the feature type you are using .
3.
Click the second ‘Stop’ button and define its settings in the same way.
4.
Click the ‘Run Effect’ button to start the effect swinging.
Swi ng effects always have two end points but you can add more, intermedia te, poin ts to build more com plex effects. Click on the + button to add another point.
Saving
your
effect
To save an effect you’ve created:
1.
Select the Advanced tab and click on the ‘Save displays a small window asking for as Template’ button. Vista
a name and location for the effect.
2.
Type a name for the effe ct and choose where to save the effect. You can save the effect in either the Factory or Use
Show folder makes it easier to transf r or Show folder. Saving the effect in the er the effect between different consoles.
3.
Click on the OK button. Vista adds y you click the FX tab on Sidebar, our effect to the list of effects. Next time your effect will be in the list.
Stopping
an
effect
There are two ways to stop an effect and have the fixtures revert to their original or default values for the feature(s) that were running in the effect:
• you can stop all effects that are running, or
• you can stop just a particular effect, or
• you ca stop just particular effect type.
Stopping
all
effects
To stop all the effects that are running on your fixtu res.
1.
Select the fixtures that you want to st op the effect running on.
2.
Choose the ‘Stop SmartFX’ option from the Tools menu.
Stopping
a
particular
effect(s)
To s top one or more of the the effects that are running on your fixtures.
3.
Select the fixtures that you want to stop the effect running on.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 7 ‐ 13
Stopping an effect SmartFX
4.
Click the SmartFX button on the main toolbar – usually F11, or select the
SmartFX Editor option from the Tools menu (Ctrl + K).
5.
Select the effect you want to stop from the list of effects.
6.
Click on the Disable button.
Stopping
effect
running
on
a
feature
To stop effects that are running on a feature type – i.e. Intensity, Postion, Colour etc.
1.
Select the fixtures that you want to s top the effect running on.
2.
Click on the Palettes tab, in the sidebar, if it’s not already selected.
3.
Click on the feature type icon for the effect type y
Position, Colour, Gobo or Beam. Vista opens ou want to stop – Intensity, a popup menu:
4.
From the popup menu select the ‘Stop Effect’ option.
7 ‐ 14 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Stopping an effect
Assigning Audio to a Cuelist
8.
Assigning
Audio
to
a
Cuelist
You can assign an audio track to a cuelist or cue useful if you want to
and play it in Vista. This can be
programme for a particular piece of music or dialogue.
To
a ssign
an
audio
file
to
a
Cuelist
1.
With the cuelist open in the editor select the ‘Cuelist properties’ op tion from the Edit menu or, right click on the Cuelist icon in a Quick picker and select the‘Properties’ option from the popup menu. Vista displays the Cuelist properties window:
2.
If it’s not already open click the arrow to open the Audio Playback’ section.
3.
Click the browse button and navigate to the folder containing your audio files, select a track and click the Open button. Vista copies the audio file to the ‘Audio’ folder inside your Vista Data showfile folder.
4.
Click OK to close the Cuelist properties window. rack with it but will only continue playing for the overall time of the Cuelist. To be able to hear the entire track you may need to add or lengthen cues.
To
assign
an
audio
file
to
a
specific
Cue
Y ou can also assign audio to a single cue in Vista. This can be useful to play sound effects or or short pieces of audio. To do this
1 .
With the cuelist open in the editor select the Cue then select ‘Cue properties’ option from the Edit menu or, right click on the Cue tile and select the ‘Cue
Properties’ option from the popup menu.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 8 ‐ 1
Using Learn Timing to adjust cue timing
2.
Follow steps 2 – 4 as above.
Assigning Audio to a Cuelist
Using
Learn
Timing
to
adjust
cue
timing
You can programme a Cuelist then use the ‘Learn timing’ window to adjust the
Cue start times based on your actions. This can be useful if you wa nt to fine-tune
Cue timing to an audio or video track.
Using
Learn
Timing
1.
Open the Cuelist you want to use.
2.
Select the ‘Learn timing…’ o
Learn Timing windo w: ption from the Tools menu. Vista opens the
3.
To keep the existing timing for cues tick the ‘maintain Cue Duration’ checkbox. If this box is not ticked all cues (and their events) will be stretched or shrunk to match the time between cue start times.
A djusting
cues
to
timecode
4.
If you want to learn timing based on a Timecode source tick the ‘Enable
Timecode’ checkbox. Vista will then display the Timecode viewer (and controls if you are using internal timecode). If you are not using timecode leave this box unchecked.
8 ‐ 2 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Assigning Audio to a Cuelist Using Learn Timing to adjust cue timing
Adjusting
cues
based
on
audio
or
video
You can adjust cue timing to match the audio in a cuelist or while you are listing to or watching a recording. To do this:
5.
Click the skip to start button , in the Learn Timing window, twice to ensure you are at the start of your first cue
6.
When you are ready click the play b utton , in the Learn Timing window to set the start time of the first cue. If you have enabled timecode the timin g field of the first cue will be automatically changed to a timecode type. If you are not using timecode the start of the first cue will be set to Halt.
7.
Continue to press the play button wheneve r you want the next cue to start.
All subsequent cues are automatically set to ‘Follow’ mode with their start time adjusted in rel ation to the previous cue.
8.
When you are finished click the Done button to close the learn timing window.
Vista automatically changes the cues start action to ‘Follow’ and adjusts the start time in relation to the previous cue. To see how your cues will playback in relation to the timeline and each other, click the ‘View cues in layout mode’ button
Â
Tip: When you use ‘Learn timing’ with Timecode, Vista sets the first cue to start at a Timecode and then uses Vista’ cues. If you want every cue to be se s internal clock to start the following t to timecode mode you can change all the Follow cues convert their start times to Time code. To do this:
1.
Select all the ‘follow’ cues by shift clicking in the cue tile view
2.
Select the ‘cue properties’ option from the Edit menu
3.
If it’s not already open click the triangle button beside the Timing option
4.
Click on the green Follow icon and change it to Timecode
Vista User Guide, Version 2 8 ‐ 3
Using Timecode to control Cuelists Automating Playback
9.
Automating
Playback
to
control
Cuelists
You can use Linear Time Code (LTC) or Midi Time Code (MTC) to trigger cues.
To do this see If you are going to be using timecode to running the Vista in c onjunction with a device that generates SMPTE timecode, you can simul ate the timecode so you can get y our show running i n time without needing the actual timecode from the other device.
To set up the timecode:
1.
Choose the Timecode option from the File menu. Vista displays the timecode properties window:
2.
Set the Timecode sou rce. The options are Linear Time Code (LTC), MIDI
Time Code (MTC) or Vista’s Internal clock
3.
Set the Frame rate from the drop down menu.
4.
Set the Timecode Offset if required. The offset time is added to the incoming timecode. For example if the offset is 01:00:00:00 (1hr) and the incoming timecod e is 00:00:10:0
10secs) is received.
0 (10 secs) Vista will treat it as though 01:00:10:00 (1hr
5.
Hit the Start button t o start the timecode running and the Stop button to stop it. The Time Code field shows the elapsed time, and hitting the Reset buttons clears this fi eld.
6 .
To close the window, click the ‘X’ symbol in the top right corner.
9 ‐ 4 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Automating Playback Using Date and Time to control cuelists
Playback
Lag
Compensation
The Lag compensation field is used to compensate for slow midi data transmission. If your cues are not running at the expected time you may need to enter a value in this field. For example enter run half a second earlier than programmed. ing 0.5s will mean that all your cues
Timecode
dropouts
The Freewheeling time field is used to cope with errors in the SMPTE code coming from an exte
P rnal device such as a Tape player. When Vista encounters a
SM TE error it will simulate timecode for a period before assuming the timecode has ended. This field sets the number of seconds Vista will allow to pass while it simu lates SMPTE until it relinquishe s control.
Disabling
all
timecode
To disable timecode for all cues, choose the Disable option from the Timecode source drop down. This can be useful is you want temporarily to stop timecode from triggering your cuelists.
Using
Date
and
Time
to
control
cuelists
You can set Vista to automatically play cuelists, trigger snapshots and more based on the date and time.
Managing
date
and
time
events
You can add, delete, edit duplicate or test date the ‘Date and Time events…’ option from and Time Events window:
and time events. To do this select
the Tools menu. Vista opens the Date
T his wi ndow displays a l ist of all your Date and Time events.
This option…
New
Delete does this…
Opens the ‘New Date and Time Event’ window where you can set up an event to be triggered base on the date and time.
Deletes the selected event. d
Vista User Guide, Version 2 9 ‐ 5
Using Date and Time to control cuelists
This option…
Edit
Duplicate
Test Now
Global Enable
Automating Playback does this…
Opens the selected event so that you can modify it’s settings.
Duplicated the selected event
Click this button to test the event, no matter what the current time is.
You can disable all date and time events by unchecking this box..
S etting
u p
a
new
d ate
and
time
event
T o set up events that will be triggered based on the date and time, choose the
‘Date and Time events …’ option from the Tools menu. Vista opens t he Date and
Time Events window
Th is option…
New
+ Add
Delete
Mo dify
Duplicate
Checkbox
Global Enable does this…
Opens the ‘New Event’ window where you can set up an event to be triggered based on the date and time.
Click the + icon to add a new effect type that is synchronised with the other features(s) in this effect.
Deletes the selected event.
Opens the selected event so that you can modify it’s settings.
Duplicated the selected event
If the checkbox, beside an event, is NOT ticked the event will not be activated.
You can disable all date and time events by unchecking this box..
9 ‐ 6 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Automating Playback Creating a New Event
Disabling
all
date
and
time
events
Y
T te ou can also disable all date and time events by choosing the Disable All ime/Date Events option from the Vista menu. This can be useful is you want mporarily to stop events being triggered.
Creating
a
New
Event
Date / Time events can automatically control playback and other actions. To create a new event:
1.
Choose the New Event... option from the Date/Time Events window. Vista opens the New Event window:
2.
Select the command to insert from the Action column:
This option…
Play, Back, Pause,
Assert, Skip Fwd,
Skip Back, Release,
Flash
Inhibit does this…
Acts on the Cuelist as if you had pressed the corresponding button on the playback controls for that clip. Select the Cuelist from the Target column
Equivalent to pressing the flash button on a
Cuelist’s playback controls. You must also enter either ‘on’ ‘off’ or ‘toggle’ in the Flash enabled box to set the flash button action.
Inhibits (blinds) or un-inhibits the clip. You must also enter either ‘on’ ‘off’ or ‘toggle’ in the Inhibit enabled box to set the flash button action.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 9 ‐ 7
Creating a New Event Automating Playback
This option…
Rate
Release All does this…
The Rate field is a percentage field and only allows valid input (e.g. numerical % value).
R eleases All active Cuelists. No other options are available when this command is selected.
Timecode reset
Timecode enable
Jump
R esets the timec ode to 00:00:00:00.
Sets a Cuelist to be activated by Timecode.
A llows you to Jump to a specific Cue within a
C uelist. You can select a cue f rom the popup menu in the Cue field.
Loads the snapshot selected in the Target box Snapshot
3.
Select the Cuelist to be triggered from the target column.
4.
Enter an on or off com the option field. mand or rate setting or cue number, if app licable, in
5.
Type a label for the Event in Name box.
6.
Set the time of day, to trigger the event, in the Time box. The time is display ed as a 12 hour AM/PM clock.
7 .
If yo u want an event t the number of times to o repeat periodically, check the Repeat box and spe
repeat and the Interval (in minutes), betw een cify repetitions.
8.
Select the days of the week you want the event to run on by ticking th e check boxes.
9.
If you want an event to only be activated after a certain date. Tick the St art
Date box and specify the date when the event should first be triggered.
10.
If you want an event to stop running after a certain date. Tick the End Date box and specify the date when the event should last be triggered
11.
Tick the Enabled checkbox to activate the event. If this box is not ticked the event will not run.
12.
Click the OK button to save the event.
9 ‐ 8 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Controlling and monitoring playback
The Playback Control Window
10.
The
Pla yback
Cont rol
Window
Controlling
an d
monitoring
playback
When you’ve got a full sho w going it’s likely that you’ll hav on the console and being played back. e multiple Cuelists
To see what’s going on at any time, click the Playback Control button on the main toolbar at the top of the screen. Vista displays the Playback Control window:
This screen lists all the cuelists that are playing and gives you a handy point from which to control and edit them. The window is made up of two panes tha resized by clicking on the vertical dividi t can be ng line and dragging the divider to the left or right.
Cuelist
pane
The left side of the screen displays a list of all Cuelists and can display up to twelve columns that show playback status and some Cuelist properties.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 10 ‐ 9
Controlling and monitoring playback The Playback Control Window
This column…
Cuelist Name
Current Cue
Status
Active
Priority
Programming indicates…
The name of the Cuelist.
Shows the current Cue name and number. Cuelists that have not been run show the first Cue name.
The Playback State of the cuelist
- HTP set o n
- On Playback. The Cuelist is on a playback control.
- SMPTE timecode locked (not implemented)
- Audio (not implemented)
- Inhibited
Shows if the Cuelist is playing or has been played.
Shows the priority of the Cuelist.
Shows the features (Intensity, Position, Colour,
Gobo, Beam) programmed in this cuelist.
HTP
Release Time
Shows the ‘HTP Intensity’ property setting.
Shows the Cuelist’s release time.
Inhibited Shows if a Cuelist has been inhibited (made blind).
Notes This column is for notes and comments. To add a note click, double click on the notes cell.
You can change the setting of a cell by double click on the cel selecting from a list of options or entering a new l and either
value. You can also right-click on the cell to open an editing window for that c ell. Not all cells are editable
You can sort the Cuelist list by clicking on any of example to show all the Cuelists that are on play the column headings. For back controls, at the top of the list, click on ‘On Playback’. Click the column heading again t o reverse the order.
You can resize columns by clicking between th e headings and dragging the column to suit. To show or hide columns right-click in the Cuelist pane and select
‘Show/Hide fields’ from the popup menu.
Cue
pane
The right column shows the Cues in the Cue list selected in the left column and is divided into six columns that show Cue detail an d progress:
This column… indicates…
10 ‐ 10 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Playback Control Window
This column…
ID
Cue
Programming
Progress
Time
Follow Action
Follow delay
Notes
Controlling and monitoring playback indicates…
Shows the Cue number
Shows the Cue name.
Shows the features types programmed in this cue.
Click this button to play the cue
Provides a visual display of the Cue’s progress and
Shows the progress of the Cue as a percentage
Click this button to skip to the end of the cue
Shows the elapsed time, time remaining and total fade time for the Cue. I.E.
1/5 [6]
Elapsed time is 1 second
Time remaining is 5 seconds
Total fade time is 6 seconds
Shows how the cue starts.
Start – the Cuelist starts ‘n’ seconds after the start of the previous cue
End – the Cuelist star ts ‘n’ seconds after the end of the previous cue
Wait – the next Cue will play when Go is pressed
Shows the delay time for the ‘follow action’ described above.
This column is for notes and comments. To add a note click, double click on the notes cell.
Con trol
and
Playb ack
buttons
You can use playback button toolbar to control one or more Cuelists. To show or hide the playback buttons choose the ‘Playback Control’ option from the
Too lbars submenu on the View menu :
This button… does t his…
Jumps to the start of the Cuelist
Cues backwards to the previous Cue marker of the selected Cuelist
Vista User Guide, Version 2 10 ‐ 11
Controlling and monitoring playback The Playback Control Window
This button… does this…
Pauses playback of the selected Cuelist(s)
Commences (Go) Playback the selected Cuelist(s)
Cues forwards to the next Cue of the Cuelist
Jumps to the end of the selected Cuelist.
Releases the selected Cuelist – fixtures return to their previous settings:
Filtering
the
cuelists
If the ‘Only show active cuelists’ button is highlighted only cuelists that are being played will be shown in the left pane. You can also set the this option on or off from the View menu.
Auto
Scroll
If the ‘Auto Scroll’ option is highlighted you the cue panel will scroll to keep the current cue visible. You can also set the this option on or off from the View menu.
Dragable
playhead
If the ‘Dragable Playhead’ option is ticked you can control a Cuelist’s playback by clicking on the Cue progress indicator bars. You can also set the this option on or off from the View menu
10 ‐ 12 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Playback Control Window Controlling and monitoring playback
Click on the > button on the left side, of the bar, to play the Cue, click on the >> button to go to the end of the Cue or click anywhere in the Cue bar to jump to th at point.
If the ‘Dragable Playhead’ button is highlighted click on it (so it is de-selected) to prevent accidental triggering of Cue .
Search
You can search for a cuelist or cue by clicking on the corresponding search button. You can also do this by choosing the ‘Search’ option from the View menu.
Editing
in
the
Playback
control
window
There are two ways you change Cue names, times and end-of-Cue actions from within the Playback control window. You can:
• double-click on the Cue Name, Time, At End setting or
Notes field and edit the field directly.
• right-click on the Cue Name, Time, At End setting or Notes field and select the ‘Edit field of selected Cue(s)’ option from the popup window.
To
edit
a
field
directly
1.
Double-click on the Cue Name, Time, At End setting or Notes field.
2.
Choose from the list of options or enter a new name, time etc.
3.
To
use
the
Edit
field
w indow
1.
Select one or control key. r or
2.
th field that you want to change and select the edit option.
Vista opens the Edit field window.
3.
Enter a new name, time etc.
4.
Click the OK button.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 10 ‐ 13
Console layout
Using the console hardware
11.
Using
the
console
hardware
Console
layout
Vista consoles and control surfaces provide the faders, encoders, switches and displays you’ll need to control your lighting rig. The layout of each product is slightly different and the quantity of playback controls varies.
T4
Console
The T4 console featur es:
• LCD Pen/Tablet module that includes, the Grand Master &
DBO, 12 Functi on buttons, 2 sets of modifier buttons, a keyboard & trackpad
• 4 Playback mo dules with faders
• 2 Playback modules without faders
• 2 Superplayback/Programming modules.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 11 ‐ 1
T2 Console Using the console hardware
T2
Console
The T2 console features:
• LCD Pen/Tab keyboard let module that includes, the Grand Master &
DBO, 12 Function buttons, 2 sets of modifier buttons, a
& trackpad
• 2 Playback modules with faders
• 1 Playb ack modules without faders
• 1 Superplayback/Programming modules.
I3
Console
• 2 Playback modules with faders
• 2 Playback modules without faders
• 1 Superplayback/Programming modules.
L5
Console
The L53 console features:
• LCD Pen/Tablet module that includes, the Grand Master &
DBO, 12 Function buttons, 2 sets of modifier buttons, a keyboard & trackpad
• 2 Playback modules with faders
• 2 Playback modules with out faders
• 1 Superplayback/Programming modules.
S3
Contro S urface
The S3 control surface features:
• 2 Playback modules with faders
• 2 Playback modules without faders
• 1 Superplayback/Programming modules.
S1
Control
Surface
The S1 control surface features:
• 1 Playback modules with faders
• 1 Superplayback/Programming modules.
11 ‐ 2 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Using the console hardware
M1
Control
surface
The M1 control surface features:
• 1 Playback modules with faders.
M1 Control surface
Grand
Master
and
DBO
The rotary Grand Master control scales the intensity of all output from the Vista system.
The Dead Black Out (DBO) button takes all intensity to 0%, while it is held down.
Function
keys
The function function buttons provide quick access to many commands and functions. The buttons are user configurable so you can assign functions you use frequently and have access to function at the press of a button rather than having to choose the option from a menu or icon.
The number and location of the function buttons varies from console to console:
• I-series consoles provide six function buttons located at the top centre of the unit
• S-series consoles provide five function buttons located at the top centre of the unit
• T4 and T2 consoles have 12 buttons located above the main display
• I3 consoles have 6 buttons located at the top centre of the console
• S3 control surfaces have 5 buttons located at the top centre of the console
• S1 control surfaces have 6 buttons located below the GM &
DBO controls
• M1 control surfaces do not have function buttons.
Your keyboard Fun the Vista PC version ction keys ‘F1 – F12’ can be used in place of these button
, the Function keys ‘F1 – F5 or F1 – F12’ can be us s. On ed in place of these buttons.
To assign a function to one of the buttons:
1.
Click the Conso le button to display the Console screen. The function keys ar at the top of the Console screen. e
2.
Rig ht-click on a button and select a command from the popup menu.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 11 ‐ 3
The modifier keys Using the console hardware
T he
mod ifier
keys
The
LR
key
(T
serie s
consoles
only)
The LR button chan b utton d own then t ges a pen tablet tap to a right tap. To ‘right-clic ap the pen. k’ hold this
The
coloured
modi fier
keys
The coloured (Red, Yellow, Green, Blue) modifier buttons provide alternate f unction s when you during playback.
press a button on the console while programming and
You can also use keyboard equivalents in place of the modifiers:
• Shift is equivalent to the Red buttton
• Control is equivalent to the Yellow button
• Alt is the equivalent of the Green button
• Control + Alt is the equivalent of the Blue button.
The
Super
Play back
/
Programmer
controls
T hese co ntrols are u press the ‘Menu’ bu sed during programming and playback. To switch functions tton and then select from the three options:
• IPCG – stands for Intensity, Position, Colour, Gobo, Bea m and puts the controls into editing (aka programming) mode. In this mode the buttons and encoder wheels can be used to set Intensity levels, Pan Tilt and all the other features of your fixtures
• Play – puts the controls int o playback mode . In this mode the controls and buttons provide quick access to the regular and advanced cuelist playback options.
• SFX – stands for Smart Effects . This mode let’s you use the buttons and encoders control the most frequently used effects settings.
11 ‐ 4 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Using the console hardware The Super Playback / Programmer controls
Editor
(aka
Programmer)
mode
When you select fixtures in the Chooser or Timeline window the hardware controls can be used instead or th e on screen palettes to adjust setting for
Intensity, Position, Colour, Gobo and Miscellaneous parameters
Programmer
mode
If the controls are not already in Programming mode press the menu button the n the button labelled ‘IPCG’ to switch into to programmer mode:
This button… does this…
I /POS Press this button to put the encoders and lower 6 buttons in
Intensity p lus Position mode. Pressing it again cycles the controls through any available parameters or alternate m odes (Angular position and Strobe & Shutter).
Col
Gobo
Press this button to put the encoders and lower 6 buttons in
Colour mode (HSV). Pressing it again cycle s the controls through any available parameters or alternate modes (CMY,
RGB, Colour Wheel Colour )
Press this button to put the encoders and lower 6 buttons in
Gobo mode. Pressing it again cycles the controls throu any available parameters or alternate modes. gh
Vista User Guide, Version 2 11 ‐ 5
The Super Playback / Programmer controls Using the console hardware
This button… does this…
Beam Press this button to put the encoders and lower 6 buttons in
Beam mod e. Pressing it again cycles the controls through any available parameters or alternate modes.
Menu
Home
(Clear)
Full
(Zero)
Opens the Super Playback top level menu screen. Double tap the menu button to switch between Playback and
Programming mode.
Sets the associated feature to its default (or home) value.
Hold the yellow modif settings. ier (or Ctrl key) to clear the feature
Sets the associated featur e to its maximum values. I.E. this would set Intensity to 100.
Hold the yel low modifier (or Ctrl key) to set the feature to its minimum value.
>>
Mode
For Gobo (or Colour) wheel featu res this button toggles between the fixtures wheels – i.e. Gobo wheel 1,
2, etc
Gobo wheel
For Gobo wheels that have rotating gobos this button toggle the rotation encoder between Index and Spin mode. s
< >
Encoders
<- Left arrow
-> Right arrow
This button reverses the direction of a spinning colour or gobo wheel or individual gobo.
Rotate to set the associated paramete r to the required value.
Selects the previous Fixture
Selects the next fixture
Super
Fine
Mode
Hold down the Green modifier button or the Alt (Option) button, on your keyboard, to put the encoders into super-fine mode.
Fixture
Selection
butto ns
The left and right a used to select the P rrow buttons located just above the encoder wheels can be revious or Next fixture in a selection.
If there’s no fixture patched fixtures. s selected pressing the buttons will cycle through all te
11 ‐ 6 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Using the console hardware The Super Playback / Programmer controls
E ditor
intensity
The overall intensity from the Editor is controlled by the fader located, on the left s ide, be low the enco der wheels.
Editor
‘Live’
time
The fader located, on t he right side, below the en coder wheels can be used to adjust the Live time and other feature setting
A t the bo ttom (o%) snap to the new val
. At the top (100%) position th e Intensity, Position, Colour s fade in over the ‘Live time’ set in the Editor window.
position the feature settings fade in over 0 seconds – i..e they ue.
S uper
P laybac k
mode
l
In playback mode t ink to t he selected he Super Playback se playback. This means that when you press buttons and encoders in this section. ction controls and buttons automatically
the ‘Select’ (*) button on any cuelist playback you can control that cuelist with the faders,
Play
controls
The faders and buttons, below play function. the encoders provide quick access to all the cuelist
This button … does this…
Jumps to the start of the Cuelist
Cues backwards to the p
Cuelist revious Cue marker of the selected
Cues forwards to the next Cue of the Cuelist
Jumps to the end of the selected Cuelist.
Not used upper
Pauses playback of the selected Cuelist(s) lower
Commences (Go) Playback the selected cuelist(s)
(Left flash)
Flashes intensity of the super playback cuelist to the maximum value.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 11 ‐ 7
The Super Playback / Programmer controls Using the console hardware
This button… does this…
(Right)
Crossfade
Not used
Â
You can config com ure these buttons in the Console window. See Assigni ng a ponent to th e playback controls on page 11-13
Super
Playback
mode
extended
controls
I f the controls ar e n ot already in Playback mode press the menu bu tton then the b y utton lab elled ‘Pla y’ to switch into to Playback mode. The top row of bu ou select from the playback con trol pages: ttons let
This button… does this…
Control Selects the normal cuelist play mode controls
Chase
SmartFX
Load
Lock
Menu
Select the cuelist Chase controls
Selects the cuelist SmartFX controls
Press Load then any key on a normal playback to load that cuelist into the Superplayback.
Locks the current cuelist onto the Superplayback. When lock is selected pressing Select (*) on another playback will not cjange th e Superplayback cuelist.
Opens the Superplayback top level menu screen. Double the m enu button to switch between Playback and
Programming mode. tap
Cuelist
Control
(normal)
mode
In the Cuelist ‘Control’ mode you can cont several play options using the botto rol the playback rate and select from m row of buttons:
This button… does this…
Rate
100%
Enables the the encoder right to spee left encoder for rate control of playback. Turn to the left to slow the playback rate and to the d it up.
Resets th e playback rate to normal. At 100% the cuelist plays back using the fade times set in the cues.
11 ‐ 8 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Using the console hardware The Super Playback / Programmer controls
This button… does this…
Jump Opens the cuelist jump window on the main screen. Used to jump from one cue to another cue ou
Cue you want to jump to in the Jump window. See Using the
Jump window on page 11-10
Press Go to fade to that cue. t of sequence. Select the
Shuttle Enables the middle encoder for manual co
Move the encoder clockwise to advance an ntrol of playback. d anti-clockwise to go backwards.
Release
Select
Releases the cuelist. Fixtures return to the previous settings or to their defaults.
Selects the cuelist on the SuperPlayback.
Cuelist
Chase
mode
In the Cuelist ‘Ch ase’ mode you can start a cuelist cha sing. change the chase rate
This button… does this…
Rate Enables the left encoder for rate control of playback. Turn the encoder to the left to slow the playback rate and to the right to speed it up.
Sync
Forward
Synchronises the chase
Turns the chase mode on and runs forwards. If the cuelist is already chasing forward pressing the button will turn chase mode off.
Reverse
Bounce
Random
Turns the chase mode on and runs backwards. If the cuelist is already chasing backward pressing the button will turn chase mode off.
Turns the chase mode on in bounce mode (i.e. run from firs to last cue then last to first cue). If the cuelist is already bouncing pressing the button will turn chase mode off. t
Turns the chase mode on and runs in a random order. If the cuelist is already in random pressing the button will turn chase mode off.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 11 ‐ 9
The Super Playback / Programmer controls Using the console hardware
Cuelist
FX
(effects)
mode
In the Cuelist ‘FX ’ m de you can control the size, rate and phase of effects th e c nsole: at
This button… do es this…
Encoders
Reset
En ables the encoders. To avoid accidentally changing FX settings turn the encoders off.
Resets the effect(s) Size to it’s programmed settings
Reset Resets the effect(s) Rate to it’s programmed settings
All /Cuelist / All - selects all running effect s for adjustment
Active.
Cuelist - selects the effects in the selected cuelist for
(press to toggle) adjustment
Active - selects the active effects for adjustment
Forward /
Backward
(press to toggle)
Changes the direction of the selected effect(s)
Sync Re-synchronises the selected effects.
Using
the
Jump
window
During playback yo can use the jump window to quickly select a cue, out o
a fade it in. f the
• press a Selec t button on any playback to bring that cuelist onto the
• press the Jump button in the super playback
Vista displays the Jump to Cue window:
11 ‐ 10 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Using the console hardware Playbacks with faders
This option… does this…
Cuelist Selects the cuelist to jump to. This field is automatically set to the cuelist on the superplayback.
Cue Selects the cue to jump to. To find the cue you want to jump to type the cue number or a part of the cue name in the search box, or select the cue from the list
Cue Timing
Live Timing
Arm & Close
Crossfades using the new cues fade time
Crossfades using the Live time
Closes the Jump window with the selected cue ready to play
Press the Play button to complete the jump.
.
To complete the Jump and fade in the selected cue, without using the Arm and
Close option;
• press the keyboard Enter key, or
• use the Cuelist’s Go button, or
• click the OK button.
Playbacks
with
faders
Depending on yo sets consisting of ur onsole type you will have one of more ‘Playback with include a display. c l fader’
Vista User Guide, Version 2 11 ‐ 11
Playbacks without faders Using the console hardware
These playbacks consist of:
• a Select button – normally used to select the playback
• a display – used to display the name of the cuelist or other component that’s being controlled
• a Go button – normally used to play the the cuelist or other component
• a fader – used to control th e intensity of a cuelist
• a flash butto n – normally used to momentarily flash the intensity of a cuelist to full.
Playbacks
without
faders
These button-only playback sets are available of the T4, T2, I3, and S3 consoles.
These playbacks consist of:
• a Select button – normally used to select the playback
• a display – used to display the name of the cuelist or other component t hat’s being controlled
• a Go button – normally used to play the cuelist or other component.
Page
controls
Each playback module consists of 5 playbacks. Cuelists and other components can be assigned to these controls as pages. To change pages:
• press the Page Up button to advance to the next page number
• press the Page Down button to go back to the previous page number.
11 ‐ 12 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Using the console hardware Configuring the console for Playback
Configuring
the
console
for
Playback
Once you’ve stored a number of Cuelists, Presets, Extracts, etc, you can a those components to the playback
Console screen.
controls the way you want them using ssign
When you click the Console button on the toolbar Vista displ ays the Console screen:
On this window the Sideba filter the components you r shows a quickpicker where you can display and want to assign to the console. You can:
• choo se a component type (Cuelists, Groups, Presets,
Extracts, Smart FX, Snapshots) from the top dropdown
• filter exam
the list by selecting a set from dropdown. For ple you can filter the list to show just Presets that inclu de Colour.
A ssigning
a
co mpon ent
to
the
playback
controls
Once you’ve selected the component type you want you can drag and drop it onto the label area corresp onding to the console’s LCD w indows:
Vista User Guide, Version 2 11 ‐ 13
Configuring the console for Playback Using the console hardware
Â
Tip: You can assign y combinatio n of components to the playback controls
– Cuelists, Groups, Presets, Extract, Effects, Favourites and Snapshots.
Splitting
playback
controls
W hen a comp onent is assig ned to a playback it uses all the controls that are available – the Go and Choose button plus the fader and flash button if available, but you can split a playbac placed on a page. k set to increase the number of components that can b e
T o do this, move the curso r to the top of the white label area. When the p changes to a split bar [=], click and drag down: ointer
P laybacks with fad drag down. ers can middle of the label area. W be split three ways. To do this move the cursor to th e hen the pointer changes to a split bar [=] click and
Â
Tip: You don’t have to split all the playbacks on a page the same way, you can split on two ways, another three ways and so on.
Expanding
playbacks
Playbacks can also be exten playback of a cuelist. Up to ded to provide more physical button controls for
five playbacks in the group can control a cuelis t:
T o expand a Playback move the cursor to the right side of the label area. When the pointer changes to a split bar [||] click and drag to the right.
Â
Tip: You can expand a Playback before or after a Cuelist has been but you can only expand into an area that is component.
assigned, not occupied by another
11 ‐ 14 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Using the console hardware Configuring the console for Playback
C onfiguring
the
ay
butt ons
and
faders
Normal, split and expanded playbacks have their buttons and faders set up with the default configuration. T the Help key [!] on T series o see how the buttons and faders are configured press
consoles Ctrl + ? on a PC.
Vista displays the button a window: nd fader functions on the LCDs and in the Console
You can assign different actions to these buttons and faders to suit your r equirements or playback s tyle.
T o assign an actio n:
1.
Click the Console butt on to display the Console screen.
2 .
Click on u
3 .
Click on the required b utton or fader action and drag it on top of th e button or fader you want to use for that function.
Some buttons and faders must be used together. For example if you make a fader a ‘Cross fader’ you should also assign a ‘Toggle Xfader’ button to the button below the fader. Likewise if you make a fader a ‘Rate fader’ you should also assign a ‘Toggle rate fader ’ button to the button below the fader.
C uelist
buttons
The following button actions are av ailable:
Th is button action … does this…
Unassigned The button has no action.
Play
Jump
Inhibit
Flash
Flash Submaste r
Pause
Edit
Plays (starts playback of) a cuelist.
Opens the Jump window. See Using the keyboard to
Jump on page xxx.
Stops the cuelist pla yback, Intensity i and all other parameters revert to the s reduced to 0 ir previous setting. Press the button again to enable or re-assert the c list.
Sets the button to mome ntarily fla sh tensity to full.
This is the default assignment for the square buttons below the faders.
Sets th b on a Submaster. n Intensity to full
Pauses playback of a cuelist.
Opens a Cuelist, for editing, in the Editor window.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 11 ‐ 15
Configuring the console for Playback Using the console hardware
This button action …
Skip Forward
Release
Skip Back
Skip to End
Select
Re-assert
Chase Toggle
Chase Direction
Chase Forward
Chase Backward
Chase Bounce
Chase Random
Skip to Start
Exit Loop
Sync FX
Sync Chase does th is…
Steps forwards to the next Cue of the cuelist.
Releases a cuelist.
Steps backwards to the previous Cue marker of the selected cuelist.
Jumps to the end of the cuelist.
Selects the cuelist. This is the default assignment for all * buttons.
Re-asserts a cuelist that has been overridden.
Toggles between Chase on and Chase off.
Cycles between the available chase directions in this order: Forward, Backward, Bounce, Random.
Sets the Chase direction to forwards (the normal setting). N.B. if the chase is already running forwards the button will toggle between chase off and chase forwards.
Sets the Chase direction to backwards (or reverse).
N.B. if the chase is already running backwards the button will toggle between chase off and chase backwards.
Sets the Chase direction to bounce. N.B. if the chase is already bouncing the button will toggle betw een chase off and chase bounce.
Sets the Chase direction to random. N.B. if the chase is already set to random the button will toggle betwee n chase off and chase random.
Jumps to the start of the cuelist.
Stops a loop and goes to the next cue.
11 ‐ 16 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Using the console hardware Playback status indication
Cuelist
faders
The following fader actions are available:
This button action … does this…
Blank
Intensity Fader
Cross Fader
Rate Fader
Autoplay Fader fader has no action.
Set is t s the fader to control the Intensity of a cuelist. This he default assignment for all faders.
Sets the fader to manually crossfade between cues.
Must be used in conjunction with a ‘Toggle Xfader’ button.
Adjusts the playback rate.
Same as the Intensity fader but also plays the cue when the fader is raised. (equivalent to pressing Go)
Submaster
FX Size Controls the size of any effect in the cuelist.
FX rate
FX phase
Controls the rate of any effect in the cuelist
Controls the phase offset of any effect in the cuelist
Auto Play & Release Must be used in conjunction with a Cross fader. Used enables the fader.
Â
Tip: You can sav e the b utton / fa der configuration as a default to be used when ever a cuelist is a cuelist and choose the ssigned to a playback. To do this right-click on a
‘Save as default cuelist configuration’ option .
Playback
statu s
indication
F s or Cuelists the LCD and tatus of each playback as
L EDs inside the playback buttons indicate the current follows:
Normal (2 Button Playback) Split (1 Button
Play back)
Lower Button Upper Button LCD
Current
Button
Inverted
Active
Paused Green Flashing
Green
Green Flashing
Vista User Guide, Version 2 11 ‐ 17
Playback popup menu
Running Green
Completed Red
Overridden Red Flashing
Using the console hardware
Green
Red
Red Flashing
Playback
popup
menu
You can make changes to Cuelists Pages and other components using the
Playback context menu. To open this menu right-click on the label area of any playback control. Vista displays the context menu:
This option …
Cuelist Properties
Lock item
Clear item does this…
Opens the Cuelist properties window – see below.
Locks the selected component. Components that have be locked will not be altered or replaced when a new Page or Snapshot is loaded.
Clears the selected playback – the assigned component is removed from the control.
Clear page Clears all playbacks on t assigned compo he current page – the nents are removed and a blank page is left.
Deletes the current page. Delete page
Set as default play back Sets the selected cuelist’s buttons and faders as the layout. defaults for all new cuelists.
Snapshot enabled Allows the selected playback to be included in a snapshot.
11 ‐ 18 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Using the console hardware
This option…
Set as default cuelist configuration
Adjust contrast
Setting cuelist properties does this…
Sets the selected cuelist’s properties as the defaults for all new cuelists.
Adjusts the contrast of the selected LCD window
Setting
cuelist
properties
T o o set the cuelis ption from the t propertie
popup me
6 -25 s, right click on the Cuelist name and the Propertie s nu. For more information see Cuelist Properties on page
Group
Masters
You can assign and Group to a playback. If you assign the group to a playback set, that includes a fader and flash button, you can use these controls as Group
Master Inten sity controls:
The intensity of t g
With this Group type you can do this…
Scale ( - ) also known as an
Inhibitive or
Subtractive group master
Reduce the intensity of fixtures in the group. When a
Scale(-) fader is pulled down, while a cuelist is being played, the intensity of fi reduced. xtures in that group will be
When a Scale(-) flash button is pressed the intensity of fixtures in that group will go to the level programmed in the active cuelist.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 11 ‐ 19
Group Masters Using the console hardware
Wi th you can do this…
Scale ( + ) also known as an
Additive group mas ter
Increase the intensity of fixtures in the group. When a
Scale(+) fader is pushed up, while a cuelist is being played, the intensity of fixtures in that group will be increased.
When a Scale(+) flash button is pressed the intensity of fixtures in that group will go to 100%.
HTP
Highest takes precedence
Control the the intensity of fixtures in the group on an HTP basis. If there’s no cuelist, containing the fixtures in the group, being played the fader will set the level of the fixtures between 0 and 100%.
This is the default fader and flash button setting f groups. or
Yo can assign different actions to these buttons and faders to suit your requirements or playback style.
To assign an action:
1.
Click the Console button to display the Console screen.
2.
Click on the ‘Group Faders’ or ‘Group Buttons’ tab in the sid ebar.
3.
Click on the required fader or button action and drag it on top of the button or fader you want to use for that fun ction.
The following actions are available:
Group
Buttons
The following fader actions are available:
This button action … does this…
Blank
Select
Flash ( - )
Flash ( + )
The button has no action.
Selects the group.
When a Flash(-) flash button is p ressed the intensity of fixtures in that group will go to the level programmed in the active cuelist.
When a Flash(+) flash button is pressed the intensity of fixtures in that group will go to 100%.
11 ‐ 20 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Using the console hardware Pages
This button action … does this…
Flash HTP
Highest takes precedence
Control the the intensity of fixtures in the grou an HTP basis. If there’s no cuel p on ist, containing the fixtures in the group, being played the button will set the level of the fixtures between to 100%.
Group
Fader
This button acti … does this…
Scale ( - ) also known as an
Inhibitive or
Subtractive group master
Reduce the intensity of fixtures in the group. When a
Scale(-) fader is pu lled down, while a cue is being played, the intensity of fixtures in that group will be reduced.
When a Scale(-) flash button is pressed th programmed in the active cuelist. e intensity of fixtures in that group will go to the level
Scale ( + ) Incr ease the intensity of fixtures in the group. When a also known as a
Additive group n s
Scale(+) fader is pushed up, while a cue is being increased.
When a Scale(+) flash button is pressed the intensity of fixtures in that group will go to 100%.
HTP
Highest takes precedence
Control the the intensity of fixtures in the group on an HTP basis. If there’s no cuelist, containing the fixtures in the group, being played the fader will set the level of the fixtures between 0 and 100%.
This is the default fader and flash button setting fo groups. r
Pages
Each Playback Group can be paged independently of the others, allowing for a wide variety of console configurations. To change pages, press the Up or Down arrow buttons located to the right of each playback group. On the console screen you can also select a page from the popup page selector.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 11 ‐ 21
Snapshots Using the console hardware
The Page Up and Down buttons work in three ways:
• press quickly to change the page immediately
• press and hold, for less than two seconds to display the current page number, without changing it
• press and hold, for more than two seconds to scroll the number.
Locking
a
playback
to
prevent
changing
Playbacks can be Locked to prevent whatever is assigned to that location being changed when a new page or snapshot is selected.
Components can be locked, so that they are not affected by Page changes or
Snapshots being loaded. To do this right-click on LCD, in the Console window, and choose the ‘Lock item’ option from the popup menu.
Page
Holdover
If a cuelist is playing when you change page it is held and that playback does not load the contents of the new page. The playback that is held will join the new page when:
• The cuelist id released or fully over-ridden or
• You press the page up and down buttons simultaneously
Snapshots
Snapshots allow you to store and recall the exact state of the console’s output, buttons, faders and other controls. They can be used to quickly re-configure the controls for playback, programming or a mixture of both. For example, you may have a snapshot set up for each song or part of a show. You might also have a snapshot for programming with the playback buttons assigned to provide quick access to Groups, Presets Extracts and Effects.
Snapshots can not only recall Page and Cuelist settings but also the state of the
Cuelist. For example if a Cuelist is active and in Cue 3 when the snapshot is recorded then the same state can be recalled.
To
record
a
snapshot
1.
Use the console window to assign components and configure the controls and pages the way you want them to be.
2.
Click the Create Snapshot button (normally Green + F9 or Alt+F9) on the main toolbar. Or select the ‘New Snapshot option from the Components menu. Vista displays the Create Snapshot window:
11 ‐ 22 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Using the console hardware Snapshots
This option…
Name
Record
Playback State does this…
Sets the name for the snapshot
Sets the options for the snapshot:
The state of cuelists on the current pages will be included in the snapshot. For example if a Cuelist is active in Cue 2 when the snapshot is recorded it will also be active in Cue 2 when recalled.
Includes the current fader levels in the snapshot. Fader Levels
Workspace state Saves the contents (cuelists, groups and other components) of all playbacks.
Â
Locked components are protected from any changes by snapshots. If a cuelist is part of a snapshot and it is also running on a module that will not be affected by the snapshot there can be a conflict.
In this situation:
• if the cuelist is active on the unaffected module, it is not changed
• if the cuelist is inactive on the unaffected module, it is restored to the state stored in the incoming snapshot (i.e. activated or released).
Vista User Guide, Version 2 11 ‐ 23
Snapshots Using the console hardware
Assigning
a
Snapshot
to
a
Playback
You assign Snapshot to a playback button in the Console window.
Reca lling
a
Snapshot
To recall a Snapshot, you can:
• use a playback button that has been set up as a snapshot, or
• right-click on a snapshot icon and select the ‘Apply’ option from the popup menu, or
• click on the snapshot in one of the Quick picker windows
Updating
a
Snapshot
To update a Snapshot:
1.
Make sure the snapshot is active.
2.
Change the assignment and st ate of components and pages as required.
Right-Click on the snapshot icon, in the select the Update option from the p
Console sidebar or any QuickPicker and opup menu. Vista displays the ‘Update snapshot’ window.
11 ‐ 24 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Snapshots
The Output window
12.
The
Output
window
T o open the Output window click on the icon on the main toolbar or select th icon view: e
‘Output’ option from the Window menu. Vista displays the Output window in
You use this screen to display the state of fixtures that are active – that is fixtures that have one or more parameters that are being controlled by the playbacks. The window is split vertically with multi-parameter fixtures displayed in the top pane and conventional fixtures (i.e. dimmers only) being shown in the lower pane.
If you have a large main screen or external monitors attached, you can add a new
Output window and drag it so that it is always in view. To do this select the ‘Add window > Output’ option from the Window menu.
Adding
output
view
tabs
You can create as many different views of the output as you like, each arranged in its own away. To create a new output view:
Vista User Guide, Version 2 12 ‐ 1
Configuring the Output window The Output window
You can create as many different views of your fixtures as you like, each arranged in its own away. To create a new layout view:
1.
Select the ‘Add view’ option from the View menu. Vista creates a new view tab at the bottom of the window.
2.
Type a name for the layout and click OK. Vista creates a new layout and adds a corresponding ‘tab’ at the bottom of the layout panel.
To switch between layouts click on the tab you want to use.
Configuring
the
Output
window
The Output window has a popup menu that lets you configure how the Output information is displayed. Right-click on the screen to show the configuration options:
This option…
Text Mode
Graphic mode
Source mode does this… shows the actual values of the features. If a parameter is set to a preset value, the name of the preset will be displayed rather than the value. shows a graphic representation of the features.
Shows where each feature is coming from. For example a fixture might have Intensity and Position coming from a Cuelist and Colour from the Editor Live tab.
Follow Fixture selection
Shows the selected fixtures at the top of the view
Show all fixtures Shows all fixtures
12 ‐ 2 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Output window Configuring the Output window
This option… f
A dd selected ixtures does this…
Adds the fixtures, selected in the Fixture Chooser, to the output window
Remove selected Removes the selected fixtures from the output window fixtures
Show only selected fixtures
Filters the window to only show the selected fixtures
Clear view
More detail
Clears all fixtures from the output window
Adds feature value information, in the graphic view
Less detail Hides feature value information, in the graphic view
Resize all columns Resizes all columns to their default size
Rename view Opens the Rename Viw where you can type a new name for the selected layout view
Remove view Deletes the selected layout view
The Source view shows the source of co ntrol for each of the parameters. For example if a fixture’s colour settings hav that name will be displayed in the Colour e come from a cuelist named ‘Rainbow’, column for that fixture.
Selecting
fixtures
If you click in the ID or name cell of a fixture in th e tracking view window, Vista selects that fixture or adds it to the existing selection.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 12 ‐ 3
System settings (T & I series only)
The Console control panel
13.
The
Console
control
panel
System
settings
(T
&
I
series
only)
There are a number of system settings that configure and determine how the
Vista T and I series consoles operate. To set these preferences, choose the ‘Control
Panel’ option from the File menu. Vista displays the Settings screen.
Settings
Calibrating
the
Pen
tablet
Sometimes you may have
Vista lists the pen tablets
to re-calibrate the pen tablet or external to
and touchscreens that are connected an uch screens.
To begin calibration, choose the Calibration button from the settings window. d configured.
If you don’t see a screen, make sure that it has been configured in the ‘Display and Input devices’ window – see below.
When you click on the button corresponding to the screen you want to calibrate
Vista displays the calibration window on the monitor you selected:
Vista User Guide, Version 2 13 ‐ 1
Display and Input Devices The Console control panel
Follow the on screen prompts to complete the cali bration process.
Display
and
Input
Devices
If you are using a S or M series contro l surface the display and input device
(mouse, pen tablet, etc) settings are controlled by the PC operating system.
Â
Vista has been tested with Wacom pen tablet LCDs and ELO ‘Intellitouch’ model 1715 monitor. ELO make many different including the ‘AccuTouch’ type which may no for compatibility before touch screen monitors t be compatible. Please check
purchasing touch screen monitors for use with your
To set the Pen tablets and Touchscreens that are connected t console click the Display and Input Devices button. Vista dis and Input Devices window: o your T or I series plays the Display
In this window:
• Scr een #0 is the built in Pen tablet on a T series console
• Scr een #1 is the monitor you have connected to moni out 1 tor
• Screen #2 is the monitor you have connected to monitor out 2
13 ‐ 2 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Console control panel Using the screensaver
To configure the monitors cl type connected to each outpu supported. ick on the drop down arrow and select the screen t. If your monitor does not appear it may not be
Using
the
screensaver
If you are using a S or M series control surface the display are controlled by the PC operating system.
, screensaver, settings
To set a screensaver on a T or I series console click the Screen Saver button. Vista displays the screensaver window:
This option…
On / Off
Standby
Suspend
Off does this…
Turns the screensaver on or off
Sets the how long the console must be idle before the screensaver starts.
Not required for LCD type monitors.
Sets the how long the console must be idle before
CRT type monitors go to suspend mode.
Not required for LCD type monitors.
Sets the how long the console must be idle before
CRT type monitors turn off.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 13 ‐ 3
Network preferences The Console control panel
N etwork
preferences
If you are using a S or M series control surface the network settings are controlled by the PC operating system.
To set the networking preferences, on a T or I series console click the Network settings button on the Settings screen:
This option…
Host name
DHCP / Static IP
IP Address
IP Netmask
Default Gateway does this…
Is used to identify the console when using tracking backup.
Sets the console to either obtain an IP address from a
DHCP server or use a Static IP as set below
Sets the IP address of the Vista console, e.g.
192.168.0.65
Sets the subnet mask for the I P address, e.g.
255.255.255.0
Sets default gateway for the console. Used when the destination address bis outside the local subnet.
13 ‐ 4 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Console control panel Date and time
D ate
and
time
Vista displays the time in the title bar of the main windows. If you are using a S or M series control surfac o perating system. e the date and time settings are controlled by th e PC
T o o set the date and time, on a T or I series consol e click the date and time button
Vista User Guide, Version 2 13 ‐ 5
Menus Appendix 1 – menu & toolbar reference
14.
Appendix
1
–
menu
&
toolbar
reference
Menus
F ile
menu
This optio n…
New Show
Open Show
Save Show
Save Show As
Autosave & Backup
Export
Import
- Show
- Effects
- User data
User Preferences
Timecode does this…
Creates a new show file, opening the Patch window.
Opens an existing Show file
Saves the current show
Saves the current show with a new name.
Opens the Backup window where you can setup the
Autosave and Tracking backup.
Opens the Exp ort window wehere you can export a
Show Archive File, the user added Fixture Library, the user created effects, or all show information.
Open a window t o import a Vista show Archive (*.jvz)
Opens a window to import a Vista effects file (*.jvfx)
Opens a w indow to import a User Data archive
(*.jvud)
Opens the system Se ttings window where you can configure naming formats.
Opens the Timecode properties window where you can enable or disable timecode and set thetimecode source, framerate and offset.
14 ‐ 6 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 1 – menu & toolbar reference Menus
This option…
Lock
- Entire console
- Disable editing
- Lock current show
Control panel
(consoles only)
Quit Application does this…
Prevents any operation of the console.
Only allows playback
Prevents any changes being made to the show file.
Ope ns the system properties window where y ou can calibrate the screens, configure displays, network and date settings on a T or I series console.
Close the Vista application and exit.
Edit
menu
This option…
Select All (Ctrl+A)
Undo (Ctrl+Z)
Redo (Ctrl+Y)
Cut (Ctrl+X)
Copy (Ctrl+C)
Paste (Ctrl+V)
Paste Special
(Ctrl+Shift+ V)
Remove Cue Alias
Delete (Del)
Live Properties
Cuelist Properties
Cue Properties does this…
Selects every event on the timeline.
Cancels your last action.
Repeats your last action.
Cuts the selected objects.
Copies the selected objects.
Pastes the selected objects.
Opens the Paste Special window so you can choose which attributes of the objects you copied to paste.
Removes the alias link from the selected cue.
Removes the selected event(s) from the timeline.
Displays the Properties window so you can make adjustments to the Priority and Stop Effects mode of the Live tab. (see
Displays the Properties window so you can make adjustments to the selected cuelist.
Displays the Properties window so you can make adjustment s to the selected cue.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 14 ‐ 7
Menus Appendix 1 – menu & toolbar reference
Components
menu
This option…
New Cuelist
Open Cuelist does this…
Opens a new empty cuelist. Switches to the Ch window if the Chooser or Timeline is not the t window. ooser op
Opens the Select Cuelist win an existing cuelist. dow where you can open
Closes the selected cuelist. Close Cuelist
(Ctrl+W)
Save changes to
Cuelist. (Alt+S)
Discard chan
Cuelist ges to
Duplicate Cuelist
Saves all changes made to the selected cuelist.
New Preset
New Extract
New Snapshot
New SmartFX
New Group
Update Group
Removes all changes made since the cuelist was opened or ‘Save changes’ was selected.
Opens the Copy Cuelist As window where you can save a copy of the selected cuelist with a new name and number (ID)
Opens the Create New Preset window where you can save a preset.
Opens the Create Extract window where you can save a extract
Opens the Create Snapshot window where you can save a snapshot.
Opens the Create Effect window w here you can save an effect.
Opens the Create Group w a group of fixtures. indow where you can save
Opens the Update Group window where you can sav changes to a group. e
Tools
menu
This option… does this…
14 ‐ 8 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 1 – menu & toolbar reference
This option…
Cue only editing
Move in Black does this…
Menus
Opens the Move in Black window. This enables you to move fixtures when their intensity is at zero so they’re in the right position when they turn on.
Â
The fixtures you want to pre-position must be selected before choosing this comma nd.
Insert Commands Opens the Macro Properties window. This lets you add commands, in the cuelis t’s timeline to activate other cuelists or actions.
Date & Time events Opens the Date and Time Events window where you can configure actions (for example to play a cuelist) based on the date and time.
Edit Command
Block cue (Ctrl + B)
Opens the Macro Properties window for the selected command.
Copies all tracked information to the current cue and adds release events for other feature types in this cuelist.
Unblock cue
Superblock cue
(Ctrl + Shift + B)
Removes all events add ed when a cue is blocked.
Copies all tracked information to the current cue and adds release events for other feature types. When a super-blocked cue is run any other cues being playing , that would affect the look of this cue are released.
Store All
Store Part
(Shift + Return)
Update (Ctrl + U)
Clear All
Clear / Close
Opens the Store Look window where the contents of the editor can be saved as a cue.
Opens the Store Current Events window where the contents of the editor can be saved as a cue with options for tracking, blocking and more.
Opens the Update Dialog window where the contents of the editor can be used to update a cue o r preset.
C lears all events from the selected cue or the editor’s
Live tab.
Clears the Live tab or closes the selected Cuelist. If the cuelist has unsaved changes opens the CloseCuelist window where any cha discarded. nges can be committed or
Vista User Guide, Version 2 14 ‐ 9
Menus Appendix 1 – menu & toolbar reference
This option…
Clear selected
Home selected does this…
Clears all events from the selected fixtures.
Inserts events to send all features of the selected fixtures to their home values. i.e. Intensity to 0%, position to 50/50, colour to clear, etc.
Cues
- (Ctrl + Shift + I)
- (Ctrl + I)
- (Ctrl + Left arrow)
- (Ctrl + Right arrow)
Opens the cues submenu with commands to:
- Append a new cue at the end of the cuelist.
- Insert a new cue before the selected cue.
- Insert a new cue after the selected cue.
- Delete the selected cue(s)
- Merge the selected cues
- Renumber the selected cue(s)
- Select the Previous cue
- Select the Next cue
- Set the cue follow mode to Auto, From Start (of previous), From End (of previous) or Halt (the default)
- Move Start times of the selected cues.
Live timing Opens the Live Timing window where you can set the fade time for the Live tab of the editor
Fan mode Opens a submenu where you can set the fan mode for fixture selections
Opens the cue JumpDialog window. Jump (Ctrl+ J)
Highlight (Ctrl + H) Turns highlight on or off. When on the selected fixture(s) are set to the values stored in the highlight preset (norma lly 100% intensity, open white)
Stop SmartFX
Smart FX editor
(Ctrl + K)
Blind
Release All
Arm Timecode
Cuelists
Learn timing
Stops any effects running on the selected fixtures
Opens the SmartFX window
Releases all active cuelists for incoming timecode.
where you can creat a new effect or edit a running effect
Turns off all output from the editor
Sets all cuelists, that include timecode cues, to listen
Opens the Learn Timing window where you can set cue timecode values by playing the cuelist, in the editor, and hitt ing the Go button at the time you want the cue to start.
14 ‐ 10 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 1 – menu & toolbar reference Menus
P atch
menu
This option…
Show Patch
Delete fixtures
Rename fixtures does this…
Switches to the Patch window, if it is not already open.
Removes the selected fixtures from the patch.
Renumber fixtures
Opens the Rename window where you can enter a custom name for the selected fixture(s).
Opens the Renumber window where you can change the ID number for the selected must not be in use already. fixture(s). The number
Multi-patch fixtures Creates a copy of the selected fixture, with the same ID and places it in the dock. The new fixture can then be dragged to an available address on one of the univers tabs. Multi patching lets you e
treat 2 or more fixtures as one.
Change Fixture type Opens the Change Fixture type window where you can change a fixture to a different type.
Change Fixture type Opens the Change Fixture type window where you
(All of selected type) can change all fixtures of the selected type to a different type.
Clone Fixtures
Import Fixture
Library
Makes a copy of the selected fixture(s) and places it in the Fixture pool at the bottom of the Patch window.
Opens a file browser where you can impor t a Vista 2 fixture type library archive (.jvft)
Fixture Editor
Import Patch file
Import Media Server thumbnails.
Opens the Fixture Editor where you can create a new fixture file or edit an existing one
Opens the Import Patch file window where you can select a suitably formatt ed (.csv) patch file to import.
Open the Citp w server with com indow where you can select a media patible support for CITP and import copies of the fixtures media thumbnails.
Use default media
Connect Universes Opens the Connect Universes window where you can connect the Vista universes to DMX outputs, Artnet, and Pathport devices and the Jands UD512 USB to
DMX cable.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 14 ‐ 11
Menus Appendix 1 – menu & toolbar reference
This option…
Strike
Douse
Reset does this…
Sends a strike command to the selected fixture(s).
Sends a douse command to the selected fixture(s).
Sends a reset command to the selected fixture(s).
Park Fixtures Holds the fixture in it’s current settings.
For example to provide fixed lighting for back
Once you’ve parked a fixture it will ignore al instructions until it is un-parked. l stage.
Sets a parked fixture to operate normally. UnPark Fixtures
Show Parked Fixtures Opens the Parked Fixtures window to display a l ist of parked fixtures and their settings.
Console
menu
This option…
Show Console
Desklights
Rescan for USB devices
Add …. Console
Add Virtual Super-
Playback does this…
Switches to the Console window, if it is not already open.
Opens the desklights window where you can adjust the brightness of the desklights connected to your console.
Scans the USB bus for Vista USB devices – S3, S1
E2 or UD512
, M1,
Adds the selected console or control surface type to the Console window. These windows can be dragged outside the main window.
Adds a Superplayback module to the console win
This window can be dragged outside the main dow. window.
Chooser
menu
This option…
Show Fixture
Chooser
Select All Fixtures does this…
Switches to the Fixture Chooser window, if it is not already open.
Selects all fixtures on the current fixture chooser tab.
14 ‐ 12 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 1 – menu & toolbar reference Menus
This option…
Deselect All Fixtures
Invert selection
Select Active
Select Programmed
Undo selection
Redo selection
Selection Tool
Colours and
Background
Shrink to fit
Label Position
Manage Layouts
Duplicate Layout
Layout options does this…
Deselects all fixtures across fixt ure chooser tabs
Deselects all selected fixtures and fixtures on the current layout selects all other
Selects all fixtures whose intensity is above 0%
Selects all fixtures that have active p rogramming.
Deselects the selected fixtures and selects the fixtures that were previously selected.
Reselects the fixtures that were selected before an undo selection action.
Displays a submenu to se lect the Rubberband, Lasso or Dragover selection tool.
Displays a submenu to customise the appearance of the fixture chooser window and icons. See Layout organisation on Page 5-7
Zooms the layout to fit the available window sp ace.
Displays a submenu where you can set the label position, for the selected fixture(s) to the to left or right. p, bottom,
Opens the Layouts window where you can customise the current layout. S ee Layouts on Page 5-3
Create a copy of the current layout with a new name
Displays a submenu where you can choose display options that apply to all layouts:
- False Intensity
- Show selection order
- Show grid
- Snap to grid
- Show names
- Show IDs
- Auto add new fixtures
- Preview refresh rate
T imeline
me nu
This option… does this…
Vista User Guide, Version 2 14 ‐ 13
Menus Appendix 1 – menu & toolbar reference
This option…
Show Timeline
Show tracked events
Align start
Align end
Set Event Timing
Reset to default timing
Fade Curve
Convert to Release
Event
UnTrack events
(Cue only)
Mute Events
Unmute Events
Stop Free Effects
Snap to Grid
Grid Size
Grid Origin does this…
Switches to the Timeline window, if it is not already open.
Shows or hides features that are tracking through from previous cues. Tracked events are shown as lighter bars that cannot be selected.
Aligns the start points of the selected events.
Aligns the end points of the selected events.
Opens the Event Timing window where you can edit the timing information for the selected event.
Resets the selected event(s) so that it follows the default timing for its feature ty pe.
Sets the fade type for the selected event(s).
Converts t he selected event so that it releases the control of the feature.
Undo the effect o f the selected events in the following
Cue.
Prevents the selected event(s) from being played back.
The event bar will be g reyed and when the cue is played the event will be ignored.
Removes the muting from the selected event(s)
Sets the selected event(s) to stop any free effects for the same feature type.
Sets events to snap to the timeline gridlines
Sets the gridline increme nts. The default is 0.25s
Sets how the timeline ruler shows timing:
- Start of cue, shows 0s at the start of each cue
- Start of Cuelist, shows a single continuous timeline
- Current Position, sets the 0s position to the current position of the playhead.
- Timecode, shows timecode values. (HH:MM:SS:Fs)
V iew
menu
This option…
14 ‐ 14 does this…
Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 1 – menu & toolbar reference Menus
This option…
Show Patch
Show Console
Show Fixture
Chooser
Show Timeline
Show Playback
Show Output
Window Themes does this…
Switches to the Patch window
Switches to the Console window
Switches to the Fixture Chooser window
Switches to the Timeline window.
Switches to the Playback window
Switches to the Output window.
Opens the Vista ThemeDialog window where you can customise the colour of window elements or load one of the alternate themes.
Vista Toolbar Shows or hides the window selection toolbar, at the bottom of the screen.
Add floating window Displays a submenu where you can select a window to open on the desktop or an external monitor. The available windows include the Patch, Chooser,
Playback, Output and DMX windows as well as:
- Multi Quick Picker – to display presets ,groups, etc
- Quick Picker 1-4 – a single quickpicker.
Sidebar
- (Ctrl + 1)
- (Ctrl + 2)
Command Line
Toolbars *
Only show Active cuelists
Follow on Go
Follow on Select
Displays a submenu with options to show the sidebar on either the left or right side of the screen and to set which tab is active:
- Palettes
- Components
Shows or hides the Command Line window at the bottom of the Fixture Chooser & Timeline windows
Displays a submenu to show or hide optional toolbars including, Update, Edit, Undo and more. The available toolbars depend on the current window.
Playback window only
Only show cuelists that are being played back.
Automatically select the last played cuelist.
Automatically select the cuelist on the selected playback.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 14 ‐ 15
Menus Appendix 1 – menu & toolbar reference
This option…
S earch cuelists
Auto Scroll does this…
Opens a search box so you can find a cuelist by nam e.
Au bei tomatically scrolls the list of cues so that the cue ng played is always visible.
Dragable Playhead Allows the ‘position’ bar to be dragged to play the cuelist.
Opens a search box so you can find a cue by name. Search Cues
Toolbars
Ad d View
Shows or Hides optional toolbars
Output window only
Creates a new output window and adds a selection t ab at the bottom of the window.
Add Intensity View Creates a new output window, that only shows
Intensity and adds a selection tab at the bottom of the window.
Load window layout Opens the Load Output Window to show a saved window layout.
Save window layout Saves the current output window layout.
Patch Window Only
Table view
List view
Switches the Patch window to the (default) table view
Switches the Patch window to the list view
DMX view
Ab solute Channel numbers
Switches the Patch window to the DMX view
Displays channel numbers consecutively irrespective of the universe. For example Universe 2, Channel 1 displays as channel 513
Shows or Hides optional toolbars
He lp
menu
This option…
About Vista does this…
Displays the Vista version and build information.
View Recent Changes Opens a window that shows a log of recent changes to the software.
14 ‐ 16 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 1 – menu & toolbar reference Menus
Vista User Guide, Version 2 14 ‐ 17
Installation (T2, T4, I3 & L5 Consoles) Appendix 2 – installing new software
15.
Appendix
2
–
installing
new
software
Installation
(T2,
T4,
I3
&
L5
Consoles)
If installing Vista V2 software on a Vista T2, T4 and I3 console for the first time the har
, d-drive in these consoles must be re-imaged from CD or USB stick, using the Vista V2 Console Image file.
Â
Installation of this so ftware on a console will erase all saved shows and other data . You must manually backup or archive all your existing show data (the contents of the /data/ directory) to an external storage device.
When T2 and T4 consoles start in Vista V2 fo
LCD and a down display in some co r the first time the inbuilt Tablet / ny additional monitors, touch screens or tablets automatically. This may result in incorrect operation of the may not be configured pen, and an upsidensoles. See the Known Issues section of these release notes for details on how to rectify this.
Afte r installing the Vista V2 Console Image for th
Console Ima ges can be a e first time, subsequent Vista V2 pplied with a “Re-use” option, which retains the existing hard-drive partitio ns, screen configurations, and User Data files. Also, application-only update packages can be applied using the Vista V2 Console
Update files, and update package files for Vista 1.13 – if your console is setup for dua l boot.
To
install
the
Vista
V2
Console
Image:
1.
Download the latest Vista V2 Console Image fil e and burn it to a CD, or create a bootable USB drive. Instructions for how to create a bootable USB drive can be found in Appendix 3 – creating a bootable USB device on Page 16-
22 .
2.
Insert the CD or bootable USB drive and restart the console. Note the BIOS settings in some older consoles may not have USB enabled as a boot device.
If you have connecte d your bootable USB drive to your console, but the console still boots normally, please download the Vista T Series BIOS Restore
Instructions from www.jandsvista.co
correct. m and verify the BIOS settings are
3.
When the console is finished booting, the Console Software Installer will open. Note the Pen will not work during installation; use the touch pad or a mouse inste ad.
15 ‐ 18 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 2 – installing new software Installation (T2, T4, I3 & L5 Consoles)
4.
To install the dual boot software make sure that both the Vista1 and Vista2 check boxes are selected and click the Next button. The Confirm Installation window will open.
5.
Select a Hard Disk to install to in the Target Disk Device box and select ‘Yes’ in the Proceed with Installation box.
6.
Select ‘Initialise’ in the Partitions box, or if Vista V2 has been installed previously select ‘Re-use’, and click on the ‘Next’ button to start the installation. Note this will comp letely erase the hard disk – be sure you have already backed up any importan t data.
7.
When the installation is complete, click the ‘Next‘ button
8.
Click the finish button to eject the CD (if present) and shutdown the console.
Remove the USB drive or CD from the console.
9.
When the console has fully shut down, press the Power button to restart the console.
To
install
a
Vista
V2
Console
Update
package:
If Vista V2 has been previously installed on a console, it is possible to apply most new software updates via a smaller Vista V2 Console Update package. To install a Vista V2 Console Update , first download the update file onto a USB flash drive, or FTP the file into the /Vista V2/UserData/Updates directory on the console.
1.
Boot the console into Vista V2.
2 .
If updating via USB stick, insert the USB stick into a console USB port.
3.
Select File Quit Application. Wait for the System Settings dialogue to appear.
4.
Click on ‘Apply Update’.
5.
Click ‘Browse’.
6.
If updating by USB, click on the USB flash drive in the list. If the file has been transferred via ftp, navigate to /Vista V2/UserData/Updates.
7.
Select the desired update file and Click “Open”.
8.
The update package will appear on the left hand side of the dialogue. Click on the update package. The package contents are now inspected – wait until the cursor changes back from the hourglass.
9.
Click ‘Apply Update’. The software will now install the update package.
When complete, a new dialogue will appear, warning that the console must be rebooted for the update to take effect.
10.
Click ‘OK’.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 15 ‐ 19
Installation (Windows XP, Vista & 7) Appendix 2 – installing new software
11.
Click ‘Quit’. T series consoles will now power down, while I3 consoles will reboot.
U nlike Vista 1.13, in Vista V2 there is no simple way to revert an up becom es necessary to revert to a previous version the co date. If it nsole must be re-imaged.
Installation
(Windows
XP,
Vista
&
7)
The Vista V2 software can be installed on a Windows PC running XP, Vista, or
Windows 7. Both 32 and 64 bit versions of Windows are supported. The recommended PC specification is an Intel i3 CPU, 2GB RAM, and 500MB disk space.
Â
If you want to run Vista 1.13 on the same machine, the 1.13 version must be
Build 5295 or later.
To
install
Vista
V 2
Windows
Update
files
on
a
PC:
1.
Close all open applications on the PC.
2.
Switch off and disconnect all Jands Vi sta USB devices.
3.
Launch the Vista V2 Windows Installer file. If an earlier version of Vista V2 is already installed on the PC, there’s no need the new version over the top of the old one. to un-install it - simply install
4.
Click ‘Next’.
5.
A location for the installed files is selected automatically. If required you can change the location. Click ‘Next’.
6.
A location for the User Data folder (your show files etc) is selected automatically. If required you can change the location. Click Inst all.
7.
When the installation is complete, click Finish.
Connecting
to
the
console
via
FTP
You can take advantage of the Vista’s built-in FTP server to move files from a
Mac or PC to the Vista or vice versa using FTP (File Transfer Protocol, a common method of file transfer).
Hardware
setup
Connect the console and computer to an Ethernet hub or switch using a standard
Ethernet cable, or connect the two devices to each other using a crossover
Ethernet cable.
15 ‐ 20 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 2 – installing new software Connecting to the console via FTP
Vista
software
setup
Open the Network window from the Control panel option on the File me nu, and check the ‘IP Address’ setting. If the IP address is already set, make note of the address and close the Control panel. If there’s no IP address or it’s set to 0.
0.0.0, you’ll need to assign one. The address is four groups of numbers from 0 to 255, all connected by periods. Typically, you’ll use an IP addresses starting with
192.168 (e.g., 192.168.0.65).
Computer
software
setup
Check that the computer’s TCP/IP properties are set to a different IP address in the same subnet (192.168.0.100, for example). The subnet mask should be,
255.255.255.0.
If necessary refer to your computers documentation for how to set the IP address.
Using
FTP
On the computer start an FTP client such as Filezilla, FTP Commander or
CuteFTP and open a connection to the consoles IP address (192.168.0.65). The connection requires a username a nd password as follows:
Username: byron
Pa word byron
If you use a graphical FTP client such as those mentioned above the contents of the consoles Show Data directory and sub folders will be displayed in a window such as this:
File s can now be transferred to and from the Vista by dragging them between the
Vist a ( ‘remote site’ window) and the PC ( ‘local site’ window).
Â
If the console is not booting properly it maybe possible to copy files using this method.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 15 ‐ 21
Connecting to the console via FTP Appendix 3 – creating a bootable USB device
1 6.
Appendix
3
–
creating
a
boota ble
USB
device
Major upgrades, that require the console’s hard drive to be erased, can be installed from a suitably formatted USB device. To create a USB FlashDrive that can be used to reinstall the ope console follow the steps below. rating system and Vista software on a T or I series
To use a USB flashdrive to boot the console and re-install the software, the drive needs to be 512MB or la rger and it has to be converted into a Linux system disk.
This procedure will erase all data on the FLASH drive and format it.
Onc e the FLASH drive has been converted, or if please skip to step 4. you have the original USB flashdrive supplied with your I3 you can use it for future updates. In this case
Creating
a
bo ta
USB
drive
To create the drive:
1.
Some FLASH drives come with pre-inst alled software to help users manage the files on the drive. Uninstall this software.
2.
Right-click on the USB Flash drive and selecting the “Format” option from the popup menu. Take care that you have selected the Flash drive. If you select your computer’s hard disk by mistake, you could erase it completely.
Ensure the File System option is set to FAT32 before clicking the Start button.
3.
Download and install a ISO file extractor programme such as WinRAR.
Winrar is available from http://www.rarlab.com
4.
Download the latest console ISO installer.
5.
Open the console ISO image file with the ISO file extractor.
6.
Extract all of the files and directories within the ISO file to a temporary directory on your hard drive, for example to c:\temp\iso_extract. After the files have been extracted the directory should look like this:
16 ‐ 22 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 3 – creating a bootable USB device Connecting to the console via FTP
7.
Close the ISO file extractor.
8.
Using a file manager, navigate to the isolinux directory of the extracted file for example navigate to c:\temp\iso_extract\isolinux.. s,
9.
Copy all of the fil es from the isolinux directory to the “root” of the extrac ted files eg from c:\temp\iso_extract\isolinux to c:\temp\iso_extract.
10.
e es and directories from the temporary directory eg c:\temp\iso_extr directories th w time. When the c act onto the root of the FLASH drive. Ke ep all files in the ey ere installed in. This step takes a significant amount o opy is complete, the drive directory should look f like this:
Vista User Guide, Version 2 16 ‐ 23
Connecting to the console via FTP Appendix 3 – creating a bootable USB device
11.
Note the drive letter assigned to the Flash drive by Windows, e.g. ‘E’. Open a command prompt and using this drive letter, type the following:
[Flash Drive letter]:syslinux –ma [Flash Drive letter]: –f
Example: e: <switch to the usb drive letter to run the syslinux program
E:\syslinux –ma E: -f
The FLASH Drive is now ready for use. Don’t forget to ejec t the drive using the normal Windows procedure.
Troubleshooting
Â
If you are using Windows 7, please ma ke sure you run the command line actions as Administrator. To do this:
• open the command prompt
• right click on the ‘cmd’ icon
• select ‘Run as Administrator
Â
The BIO S settin gs on older consoles may need to be changed to allow them to boot from th e USB FLASH Drive.
16 ‐ 24 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Setting up
Appendix 4 – tracking backup
17.
Appendix
4
–
tracking
backup
With Vista’s new tracking backup feature you can connect a computer, running the Vista application, or a second console that synchronises it’s show file and settings with your main console. If the main console fails for any reason, the backup system will automatically take control.
The backup system automatically copies the show programming from the main console and you can start or stop them in any order and at any time.
Setting
up
To set up a backup system the console(s) and co connected via their Ethernet ports and their netw correctly. mputer(s) have to be physically ork settings must be configured
Con necting
the
backup
To connect the main console or computer and the backup co nsole or computer you can either:
• connect from the Ethernet port of th e Console(s) and computer(s) to the Local Area Network (LAN) i n your building, or
• connect from the Ethernet port of th e Console(s) and computer(s) to a stand alone Router, or
• connect from the Ethernet port of th e Console(s) and computer(s) to a stand alone Switch or Hub, or
• connect the Ethernet port of the Co nsole(s) and computer(s) using a Crossover cable
C onfiguring
the
network
settings
All consoles or computers being used in a tracking backup system need a n IP address on the same subnet as the others. If you are using a LAN or stand-alone
Router a DHCP server will automatically assign Router IP addresses, provided you usin r console’s or computer’s network interface is set to use DHCP. If you are g a Switch, Hub or Crossover cable you’ll need to set static IPs on all the dev ices in your backup system:
Vista
T
&
I
series
network
settings
To c onfigure the network on a T or I series console:
1.
Select the Settings option from the File menu. Vista opens the Se ttings window.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 17 ‐ 25
Setting up Appendix 4 – tracking backup
2.
Click the Network button. Vista opens the Network window:
This field…
Hostname
IP Address
IP Netmask does this…
Indicates the consoles network name. You can change this field to something more meaningful (i.e. ‘T4_main’) but no two devices, on the network, can have the same hostname.
Set this field to DHCP if you are con necting to a LAN or stand alone router that has a DHCP server.
If there is no DHCP server set this field to a unique Private
IP address. For example: ‘19 2.168.0.10’
If your backup device is a second console it’s IP must be to a different addres
‘192.168.0.11’ s, in the same range. For example:
set
Normally this field should be set to 2 55.255.255.0. If connecting to a LAN consult your IT department.
Default gateway
If you are connecting to a LAN consult your IT department.
If you are using a Router with a DH CP server this field should be set to the IP of the router itself.
If you are connecting with a Switch or Crossover cable or there is no DHCP server set this fiel d to [TBA].
3.
Click OK to close the network window.
17 ‐ 26 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 4 – tracking backup Starting Tracking Backup
Computer
network
settings
Configuration of the network settings on your PC will vary depending on the OS you are using but what you’ll need t above. o enter is similar to the information detailed
The most important thing is that each console or computer should have a unique
IP and be on the same subnet. If you are using DHCP this will be taken care of automatically. If you are using static IPs make sure each one is different. For example i f the console or main computer’s IP is 192.168.0.10, your backup device should be 192.168.0.11 (or any number between 1-254 but not 10).
If yo conf u have changed your network settings restart the console or computer and irm that the new settin gs have taken effect.
Starting
Tracking
Backup
To start Tracking Backup do this:
1.
On the main console or computer select the ‘Autosave and Backup’ option on the File menu. Vista opens the Backup window:
2.
If it’s not already selected click on the ‘Tracking Backup Config’ tab.
3.
All devices in a backup system must have the same ‘Node Group’ name.
this is the master console m
If ake a note of the name (i.e. Byron_625) or change this field to a name of your choice (i.e. ‘MainStage’). If you change the Node
Group name you will be prompted to restart Vista. If you need to restart’ reopen the Backup window after the restart.
4.
Repeat steps 1 - 3 on the bac kup console or computer. Remember the Node
Group name must be exactly the same all the devices in your backup system.
5.
Restart the backup system if prompted. It is now ready for use.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 17 ‐ 27
What happens if the Master fails Appendix 4 – tracking backup
6.
On the main console or computer click on the ‘Network’ tab. Vista list of any Vi
displays a sta systems running on the same network. You should see your backup device and it should have the same Node Group name as the master:
Â
The console or computer you are working on is marked with an asterisk (*) .
7.
Click on the Network Role field of your master console.
8.
Click on the Network Role field of your backup console and select ‘Primary
Slave’ from the popup list. A Primary Slave will take over a show automatically if the Master fails, whereas a Passive slave will still ba ckup a master but will not take over a show until you click on the ‘Failover Now’ button on the Failover tab of the Backup window.
9.
When both the master and slave role hav e been set, click the ‘Apply’ button.
Vista enables the Network Traffic buttons
10.
Click the Network Traffic Enabled ‘On’ button and click ‘Apply’. Vista transfers the show file to the slave:
11.
Click the OK button to close the Backup window
What
happens
if
the
Master
fails
If the Master fails an alert window appears on the slave console:
17 ‐ 28 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 4 – tracking backup Backup status
On the slave console there are two options
1.
Click on the ‘Abort’ button to prevent the slave console from taking over th e show and beginning to output.
2.
C sh lick on the Failover now button to have the slave ow immediately and begin to output.
console take over the
If neither button is clicked the slave will take over when the countdown is finished.
Â
If you are using the DMX outputs on your Vista consol you must swap your DMX cables from the master to th e or control surface e backup console in the event of a failure.
Manually
switching
to
th e
backup
console
To manually switch to the slave device click on the ‘Failover N ow’ button on the
Failover tab.
Ba ckup
status
You can check the status of the master and slave in their respective backup windows. To do this select the status tab in the Backup window:
The master console or computer should show the Local Time Controller and
Local DMX Output being On.
The slave console or computer should show the Local Time Controller and Local
DMX Output being Off – unless the master has failed.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 17 ‐ 29
Troubleshooting Appendix 4 – tracking backup
Troubleshooting
If you cannot see your slave console on the Network tab of th e backup window:
1.
Check all your Ethernet cables and connections.
2.
If you are using a computer turn off any firewall or port blocking application.
3.
Check that the Group name is exactly the same on all devices in your backup system.
4.
Check that both the master and slave have IP addr subnet. An IP address consists of four number esses that are on the same s separated by dots (i.e.
192.168.0.1) The numbers for the master and slav same except for the last number, which must be different an
254. e should be exactly the d between 1 and
5.
On your Vista T or I series you can check the IP by opening the Settings
Network window from the File menu.
6 .
On a Windows PC you can find the IP address from the command prompt
(Start > Run > type: cmd) and type: ipconfig).
7.
On a Mac make sure that only one Netw ork Interface is active. Having both the wired (Ethernet) and wireless (Airport) interface active may cause tracking backup to fail.
8.
Check that you can ‘Ping’ from the M aster to the Slave and vice versa.
9.
On a Windows PC you can Ping another device from the comm and prompt
(Start > Run > type: cmd) and type: ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP number of anoth xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) – where er device in your system.
10.
Power down and re-start the console(s) and computer(s) y ou are using.
Private
IP
addresses
Three blocks of the IP address space are res erved for use on private networks
(local area networks). When setting static I Ps on a small network it’s best to use
IPs from one of these ranges:
10.0.
0.0 - 10.255.255.255
172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255
5
17 ‐ 30 Vista User Guide, Version 2
VNC password
Appendix 5 – using VNC on T & I ‐ series consoles
18.
Appendix
5
–
using
VNC
on
T
&
I
‐
series
consoles
VNC
password
The default password for VNC connections is ‘password’.
Starting
VNC
To start the VNC server on a Vista T series or I series console:
1.
Restart the console. When the red Boot Menu screen appears press any k ey to stop at this window. Then use keyboard arrow keys to select a startup option. Select ‘VNC’ to start VNC normally or select ‘VNC 1
VNC and set the screen resolution to 1024x768 pixels.
024x768’ to start
2.
Vista will automatically start the VNC server.
3.
Vista is now running the VNC server.
Connecting
to
Vista
using
a
Windows
PC
The following procedure is for the VNC Viewer application from Real VNC
(http://www.realvnc.com/download.html). Other VNC clients for windows work in a similar way:
1.
Check that the Vista and your PC are on the same subnet. I.E. if the Vista’s IP is 192.168.0.68, your PC should be 192.168.0.xxx (where xxx is 1-254 but not
68).
2.
Start the VNC client.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 18 ‐ 31
Connecting to Vista using a Mac Appendix 5 – using VNC on T & I ‐ series consoles
3.
In the ‘Connections Details’ window click the Options button, then the Misc tab:
4.
Tick the box marked ‘Shared Connec tion (do not disconnect other viewers)’.
Click OK to close the options window.
5.
In the ‘Connections Details’ window en ter the Vista IP (i.e. 192.168.0.65).
6.
Click OK to open the login window.
7.
Enter your password and click OK (leave the username blank).
You should now be able to control the Vista.
Connecting
to
Vista
using
a
Mac
The following procedure is for the
(http://homepage.mac.
Mac VNCViewer v2.01. com/kedoin/VNC/VNCViewer/index.html).
Other VNC clients work in a similar way:
1.
Check that the Vista and your Mac a re on the same subnet. I.E. if the Vista’s
IP is 192.168.0.68, your PC should be 192.168.0.xxx (where xxx is 1-254 b ut not 68).
2.
Start the VNC client.
18 ‐ 32 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 5 – using VNC on T & I ‐ series consoles
3 .
Connecting to Vista using a Mac shared desktop’:
4.
In the ‘Hostname : display’ window enter the Vista IP (i.e. 192.168.0.68).
5.
Clear the entry in the box to the right of the IP (or enter 0).
6 .
Click OK.. VNC will open the login window.
7.
Enter your passw ord and click OK (leave the username blank).
You should now be a ble to control the Vista.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 18 ‐ 33
Configuring the midi port Appendix 6, Using midi show control (MSC) to control cues
19.
Appe ndix
6,
Using
midi
show
contro l
(MSC)
to
control
cues
You can activate and control cues by sendin g Midi Show Control (MSC) i m essages nformatio via the mid n on using i in port on the Vista L, T, I and S series consoles. For
Midi Time Code (MTC) see Using Timecode to control
Cuelists on page 9-4
C onfiguring
the
midi
port
Before you use midi you have to s should correspond to the ID the M et a ‘device ID’ that Vista will listen on. This idi controller is sending on. To set the device
ID select ‘User preferences’ from the File menu and click on the ‘External
Control’ tab.
Set the Midi Show Control Device ID midi software packag
to correspond with your controller or the e you are using .
Â
Tip: Tick the ‘Use these settings for new shows’ checkbox to save these settings as defaults for new shows.
19 ‐ 34 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 6, Using midi show control (MSC) to control cues MSC lighting messages
M SC
n
mess ages
Midi controllers use s tandard terminolgy for lighting cues and cuelists
This MSC term is equivalent to this Vista comp onent…
Vista supports all the most commonly used MSC lighting messages.
This message…
Go
Go _Jam
Go_Off
Timed_Go
Stop does this…
If a Q_number is specified, that cue plays. If no
Q_number is specified, the next cues in numerical order and numbered id entically and which are in Open Cue
Lists GO. If a Q_number is sent without a Q_list, all cues with a number identical to Q_number and which are in
Open Cue Lists GO.
Starts a transition or fade to a cu e simultaneous with forcing the Vista’s internal timecode clock to the 'Go
Time' if the cue is a 'Timecode' cue. If no Cue Number is specified, the next cue in numerical sequence GOes and the clock of the appropriate Cue List Jams to that cue's time. If the next cue in numerical sequence is a 'Manual' cue (i.e. if it has not been stored with a particular 'Go
Time,' the Go/Jam_Clock command is ignored.
Starts a transition or fade of a cue to the off state. The fade time is determined by cuelist’s release time.
If no Cue Number is specified, the current cue GOes Off.
If a Cue Number is specified, that cue GOes Off.
Starts a timed transition or fade to a cue. If no Cue
Number is specified, the next cue in numerical sequence
GOes. Time is a standard time specification with subframes (type {ff}), providing anything from "instant" to 24 hour transitions.
Halts currently running transition(s). If no Cue Number is specified, all running transitions STOP. If a Cue
Number is specified, only that single, specific transition
STOPs, leaving all others unchanged.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 19 ‐ 35
MSC lighting messages Appendix 6, Using midi show control (MSC) to control cues
This message… does this…
R esume Causes Stopped transition(s) to continue runni ng. If no
Cue Number is specified, all Stopped transition s
Resume. If a Cue Number is specified, only tha transition Resumes, leaving all others unchange t d.
All_O ff Turns any o
all cuelist intensity output to 0% without changing ther features. Equivalent to fading the Grand
Master to 0%.
The console status prior to All_Off can be re-established by using the Restore command. Equivalent to fading the
Grand Master to 0%
Restore
Reset
Re-establishes operating status to exactly as it was prior to ALL_OFF.
Releases all running cues..
Advanced
Midi
options
You can send a message (for example Go) to s you first send an Open message to each of the messages to open and close cuelists. everal cuelists at once. To do this
cuelists. Vista supports the MSC
This message… does this…
Open_cuelist OPEN_CUE_LIST
Makes a Cu e List available to all other commands and includes any cues it may contain in the current show.
When OPEN _CUE_LIST is received, the specified Cue
List becomes active and cues in it can be accessed by normal show requirements. Q_list in Standard Form must be sent.
If the specified Cue List is already Open or if it does not exist, no change occurs.
19 ‐ 36 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 6, Using midi show control (MSC) to control cues MSC lighting messages
This message… does this…
Close_cuelist Makes a Cue List unavailable to all other command excludes any cues it may contain from the current s s and how.
When CLOSE_CUE_LIST is received, the specified Cue
List becomes inactive and cues in it cannot be accessed by normal show re in the list does not quirements, but the status of the cues
change. Q_list in Standard Form must be sent.
If the specified Cue List is already Closed or if it does not exist, no change occurs.
Midi Timecode options
You can also control Vista’s internal timecode clock with midi commands.
This message… does this…
Start_Clock Starts Vista’s internal timecode clock. If the clock is already running, no change occurs. If the clo ck is paused it continues counting from the time value which it contained while it was paused.
If Q_list is not sent, the clocks in all Open Cue Lists simultan eously.
Start
If Q_list is sent in Standard Form, only the clock in that
Cue List Starts.
Stop_Clock Stops V ista’s internal timecode clock. If the clock is already stopped, no change occurs. While the clock is stopped, it retains the time value which it contained a t the instant it received the STOP command.
If Q_list is not sent, the clocks in all Open Cue Lists Stop simultaneously.
If Q_list is sent in Stand
Cue List S tops.. ard Form, only the clock in that
Â
Vista does not support these comma
Load, Set, Fire, Standby_Plus, Stand nds: by_Minus, Sequence_Plus,
Sequence_Minus, Open_Q_Path, Close_Q_Path
Vista User Guide, Version 2 19 ‐ 37
Connecting to the serial port Appendix 7, Using serial communication to control cuelists
20.
Appendix
7,
Using
serial
communication
to
control
cuelists
You can activate and control cues by sending text commands via the serial port on a Vista console or PC running the Vista application. Mac users will need a
Keyspan 19H USB to serial converter to receive serial com mands.
Connecting
to
the
serial
port
The cable that connects from the triggering d evice to the Vista should be a standard serial cable (also called a null-modem cable, or serial printer cable), not a serial cable extension. The important feature is that that pin2 at one end needs to be connected to pin 3 at the other end and vice-versa).
Enabling
the
serial
por t
The computer or other device sending the commands and the Vista must have their serial ports set to match each other. To set the Vista serial port select ‘User preferences’ from the File menu and click on the ‘External Control’ tab. Vista displays th e ‘User preferences’ window:
Vista T, I and L consoles should be set to Serial Port 1, Baud Rate 9600, Data Bits
8, Stop Bits 1, Parity None and Flow Control Xon/Xoff.
20 ‐ 38 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 7, Using serial communication to control cuelists Playback commands
PC (Windows) systems should be set the same way but the Com port can be changed to suit your computer’s configuration
O n Mac systems the Keyspan 19HS device will appear in the Serial Por dropd own menu. t
Playback
commands
All commands should be sent to the Vista as single lines of text followed by
Return or Enter.
With serial commands you can only play the next cue in a cuelist. It is not possible to play a play a cue out of order.
The syntax for sending commands is:
Command {Cuelist ID} or {Name} or {Cuelist ID:Name}
Command The supported commands to playback and load shows:
This command… does this…
Go Plays the next cue in the cuelist. Examples:
Go 1, or Go Dimmers, or Go 1:Dimmers
Pause {ID or
Name or
ID:Name}
Rego {ID or
Name or
ID:Name}
Release
Halts playback of the specified Cue list. Example:
Pause 5
Resumes play of a paused Cuelist. Example:
Rego 5
Load {show filename}
Releases playback of the specified Cuelist. Example:
Release 1
Loads a show file. The full path to show showfile must be specified. Example:
Load C:\
Setting
fixture
levels
You can also send commands to set Fixture levels in the Programmer . The
Syntax is:
• {fixture id(s)} @ {level}
Where the fixture id is any combination of number, +, > and minus and level is a value between 0 and 100 or just f (or F) for full.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 20 ‐ 39
Setting fixture levels Appendix 7, Using serial communication to control cuelists
Examples:
• 1@F - fixture 1 to full
• 1>10-5@ 75 - fixture's 1,2,3,4,6,7,8,9 & 10 to 75%
• 1>10-3>7@f – fixtures 1,2,8,9&10 to 100%
Serial
command
acknowledgements
Vista does no t echo characters sent to the serial port but does send acknowledgements to confirm that commands have been received and either been accepted or have failed. There are three response types:
Commands
that
are
understood
and
could
be
executed.
Successful commands return the complete command appe nded with “OK”. For example
“go 1:List” it would return “go List:1 OK”.
Commands
that
are
understood
but
could
not
be
executed.
If the command is good but the object of that command is not known an error message will be returned. For example, if there was no Cuel ist 100
“ go 100” would return “100 Unknown”.
Invalid
Commands
If the command is not understand, returned.
the message “ ILLEGAL COMMAND” is
Â
Make sure that th ere is an end of line character (return or enter) at the end of each command.
Â
Commands and cuelist names are *not* case sensitive.
Â
Spaces before or after commands and cuelist names do not affect the behaviour.
20 ‐ 40 Vista User Guide, Version 2
The Fixture Type Library Editor
Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor
21.
App endix
8
–
The
Fixture
Edi tor
The Fixture
Type
Library
Editor
The new Fixture Type Library Editor is a separate application to the console software. On a Win dows installation it can be found as an alias on the deskt op and can be launched like any other Windows program. On a T-series console it is launched from the Patch window menu ‘Patch’ by selecting ‘Fixture Editor’.
When launched a w indow is presented with an expanded directory of all the
JANDS supplied fixtures, listed as manufacturer sub-di rectories, this is the factory default directory. Once this directory is co llapsed, another directory is visible, this is the User Fixture Library and will initially be empty.
Fixtures in the Factory directory cannot be modified, however, copies can be made and these will be placed in the User Fixture Library and are fully editable.
It is recommended that the latest software library be installed and an exhaustive search of the fixture library be carried out to determine if the fixture required is n ot already in the library before writi ng your own fixture profiles.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 21 ‐ 41
Creating a Fixture Profile Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor
Creating
a
Fixt ure
P rofile
T his section w ill detail, ste p by step, the process of creating a sample fixture profile. The fixture being a VL1100D Iris (I) Model.
W ex hen the Fixt ure Type Ed panded, presenting a itor is opened, the inbuilt library is automatically
Ma nufacturers list containing all JANDS supplied fixtures. The fixture library installed to see if the fixture profile you o wn fixture.
is updated regularly and the latest revision should be require is in the list before writing your
For this tutorial, collapse the ‘Factory ’ directory and select the ‘User Fixture
L ibrary’
From the Fixture menu select ‘New Fixture…’
A new, blank fixture wind ow will open with fiv e tabs across the top:
This tab… is for…
21 ‐ 42 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor
This tab…
Main
DMX Chart
DMX Macros
Notes
History is for… entering general fixture data.
All DM entered
Main tab:
X channel assignments and channel range values are
in this tab
Control macros, including strike, douse and reset are entered here.
Personal notes relating to the fixture can be entered here.
A chronological history of the fixture can be kept here.
Main
tab:
This window is used to enter general information values for your fixture. To add o r edit a value ouble click in the field and either type directly in the field or select from the field’s popup menu.
This field…
Manufacturer is for…
The name of the company that makes the fixture.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 21 ‐ 43
Main tab: Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor
This field…
Full Name
Short Name
Fixture Status
Beam Type
Frame Type
Movement Type is for…
The complete, unabbreviated name as supplied b the manufacturer. y
An abbreviated name, of your choice, for the Fixture.
This name will be used in the Chooser window when
‘show Short Name’ is selected.
Choose from the popup menu to select the appropriate status of the fixture file.
Choose from the popup menu to select the appropriate beam type of the fixture.
Choose from the popup menu to select the appropriate frame type, choose No Frame if the fixture has no framing mechanism.
Choose from the popup menu to select the appropriate movement type.
Physical Type
Light Generation
Choose from the popup menu to select the appropriate physical type.
Choose from the popup menu to select the appropriate light source.
Maximum Pan Degrees Enter the maximum pa n degrees as supplied by the manufacturer. This value is required in order for the flip function to work corr ectly. This information is generally not found in th but, is usuall y found in the manufacturers specification sheet. e DMX charts for a fixture,
Maximum Tilt Degrees Enter the maximum tilt degrees as supplied by the manufacturer. This value is flip function to work corr generally not found in th but, is usuall required in order for the ectly. This information is e DMX charts for a fixture, y found in the manufacturers specification sheet.
Element Count
Horizontally
Element Count
Vertically
Enter the number of horizontal, individually controllable elements within the fixture. Used for single fix tures with multiple elements such as LED fixtures.
Enter the number of vertical, individually controllable elements within the fixtur fixtures. e. Used for single fixtures with multiple elements such as LED
21 ‐ 44 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor
This field…
Is a Scroller
Patch Part Count
Uuid
Compatability Id
Revision
Factory Version
Carallon Version
DMX Chart tab: is for…
Defines whether the fixture is a scroller mechanism. determines how many patchable parts there are for the fixture. i.e. a par with a colour scoller will hav two parts.
scroller.
One for the par and another for the e
This is a unique identifying number assigned to the fixture by the fixture editor and c annot be changed.
This number is for advanced use. When an existing
Factory fixture is duplicated and modified it will retain programmed attributes of the original (such as
Preset information etc.) so long as this number is not altered. Once altered the fixture will b attributes. ecome an independent fixture and lose those programmed
A revision number can be added here to keep track of multiple versions of the same fixture.
This is a factory libra ry version tracking number.
This version number is supplied by the Carallon database and is not relevant when writing fixture profiles.
DMX
Chart
tab:
This icon… does this…
Opens the Add DMX Channel window
Vista User Guide, Version 2 21 ‐ 45
DMX Chart tab: Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor
This icon… does this…
Adds a DMX range to an existing channel. Inactive until a channel is created.
Adds a Custom Mode to a channel, used when a feature range is not mappable to a generic control. i.e. Iris Pulse or Gobo
Shake
Adds a slot to a colour or gobo wheel channel. . Inactive until a channel is created.
Use this button to delete selected DMX channels, Ranges,
Modes or Slots.
Add
DMX
Channel
window:
This field…
Feature
Class
is for…
This determines which control palette the feature will reside in. Intensity Class reside in the Intensity palette, Beam in the Beam palette etc.
21 ‐ 46 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor DMX Chart tab:
This field…
Feature
Type
Feature
Name
DMX Channel
Type is for…
This determines which controls on the palette cont rol which feature. For example one Beam Type may be
Iris and another Zoom. Both features appear o n the
Beam contol palette, mapped to their respective controls.
This value is automatically set by the software unless a custom feature is created in which case a user assigned name must be applied. this will detrmin if the feature is 8 bit or 16 bit. The
Fine channe here. l field becomes active if 16 bit is selected
Is the Hi byte channel for the feature. DMX Channel
Channel
DMX Channel
Fine Channel
DMX Channel
Default Value
Is the Lo byte channel for the feature (if applicable)
This is the default DMX value for home and clear, ranging from 0-255.
The DMX Chart window is used to enter all channel information for your fixture.
Using the manufacturers DMX specification sheets, a channel list will be built in here, the channels can then have various attributes set. Addition of range mapping, slots for colours and gobos, mode setti ngs for channels and any other information required to operate the fixture.
Using the sample DMX specification for a VL110 section will document how to enter data in the
0D (I) Iris Model fixture this
DMX tab for it.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 21 ‐ 47
DMX Chart tab: Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor
DMX channel specification for a VL1100D (I) Iris Model
21 ‐ 48 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor DMX Chart tab:
Channel
1:
Intensity
Click the DMX button to open the Add DMX Channel dialog. By default the dialog opens for the first time as below, it will open in the last opened state from now on. Notice the values are correct for this feat ure. Click OK to create.
The Intensity 8 bit channel 1 has been created in the DMX Chart window.
Channel
2
and
3:
Pan
Hi
and
Pan
Lo:
16b
Click the DMX button to open the Add DMX Channel dialog. Select Position in
Class and Pan in Type. In the DMX channel section select 16 bit and assign the correct channel numbers. The Default value should be set to 127 as it is a midpoint default feature and the Hi Byte value only need be set. Click OK to create.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 21 ‐ 49
DMX Chart tab: Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor
The Pan 16 bit channels 2 and 3 have been created in the DMX Chart window.
Channel
4
and
5:
Tilt
Hi
and
Tilt
Lo:
16b
Click the DMX button to open the Add DMX Channel dialog. Select Position i n
Class and Tilt in Type. In the DMX channel section select 16 bit and assign the correct channel numbers. The Default value should be set to 127 as it is a midpoint default feature and the Hi Byte valu create. e only need be set. Click OK to
21 ‐ 50 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor DMX Chart tab:
The Tilt 16 bit channels 4 and 5 have been created in the DMX Chart window.
Channel
6:
Edge
Click the DMX button to open the Add DMX Channel dialog. Select Beam in
Class and Focus in Type. In the DMX channel section select Standard and assign the correct channel number. The Default value should be set to 127 as it is a midpoint default feature. Click OK to create.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 21 ‐ 51
DMX Chart tab: Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor
The Intensity 8 bit channel 6 has been created in the DMX Chart window.
Channel
7:
Zoom
Click the DMX button to open the Add DMX Channel dialog. Select Beam in
Class and Zoom in Type. In the DMX channel section select Standard and ass ign the correct channel number. The Default value should be set to 127 as it is a midpoint default feature. Click OK to create.
21 ‐ 52 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor DMX Chart tab:
The Zoom 8 bit channel 7 has been created in the DMX Chart window.
Channel
8:
Frost
Click the DMX button to open the Add DMX Channel dialog. Select Beam in
Class and Zoom in Type. In the DMX channel section select Standard and assign the correct channel number. The Default value should be set to 0 as it is a 0 default value feature. Click OK to create.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 21 ‐ 53
DMX Chart tab: Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor
The Frost 8 bit channel 8 has been created in the DMX Chart window.
Channel
9,
10
and
11:
CMY
Colour
mix
Click the DMX button to open the Add DMX Channel dia in Class and Cyan in Type. In the DM log. Select Colour Mix
X channel section select Standard and assign the correct channel number. The Default value should be set to 0 as it is a 0 default value feature, the Hi Byte default value only need be set. Click OK to create and repeat the process for Yellow and Magenta.
21 ‐ 54 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor DMX Chart tab:
The three Colour Mix 8 bit channels 9,10 and 11 have been created in the DMX
Chart window.
Channel
12:
Gobo
Wheel
Click the DMX button to open the Add DMX Channel dialog. Select Gobo Wheel in Class and Gobo Wheel in Type. In the DMX channel section select St andard and assign the correct channel number. The Default value should be set to 0 as it is a 0 default value feature. C lick OK to create.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 21 ‐ 55
DMX Chart tab: Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor
The Gobo Wheel 8 bit channel 8 has been created in the DMX Chart window.
Channel
12:
Gobo
Wheel
(cont.)
Note there are three items added for this feature unlike previous features that have one simple range value assigned.
Index Mode : Expand this section and select the range value section as below.
As the specification requires the range for Gobo Wheel Indexing to be 0-127, the values need changing. On the right hand side of the DMX Chart window in the
DMX range section. Apply the change as seen below and click apply.
21 ‐ 56 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor DMX Chart tab:
The change to the channel range is reflected in the DMX Range column.
Rotation Mode : Expand this sectio n and select the range value section as below.
As the specification requires the range for Gobo Wheel Rotation is to be 128-255, only one range of values is required. counter clockwise values as well as these by default. The mechanism in
By default most fixtures have clockwise and a stop value. The editor places ranges for our fixture only rotates in one direction so the first thing that is required is to delete the Anti-clockwise range, the Stopped range can remain and set to 127 if desired. This will make zero rotation on the controls stop the wheel spinning at the last indexing value.
Select the Anti-clockwise range:
Now click the button to remove the range.
Channel
12:
Gobo
Wheel
(cont.)
As the ranges for Stopped and Clockwise rotation are the same as the manufacturers specification no ot her changes are required. The ranges for gobo wheel rotation are now set.
Wheel Slots : Expand this section and Select it. Notice a single Open slot is loaded with a range of 0,0.
Use the button to create as many slots as is required. In this case add five slots to make a total of six.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 21 ‐ 57
DMX Chart tab: Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor
As the Open slot values are already correct, select Slot #2.
Channel
12:
Gobo
Wheel
(cont.)
On the right hand side of the DMX Chart window to add appropriate data with the selected slot.
the controls are now available
A Name may be applied, a Slot Type can be set (G be assigned, Category is useful in re obo or Colour) a Category can modelling gobo patterns when changing fixture types, and an image can be set for preview on the console.
21 ‐ 58 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor DMX Chart tab:
As with other features th e DMX Range section is used to set the appropriate values for the slot, as the specificatio n below indicates, different values are required to operate the slot in ei ther Indexing or Rotating modes.
Channel
12:
Gobo
Wheel
(cont.)
Set the DMX Range values for Slot #2 as sho wn below, follow the same procedure for the remaining slots. The correc t value for Slot #2 (18 or 146) will automatically switch between the two values depending on which control is currently being used on the console, i.e. indexing or rotating.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 21 ‐ 59
DMX Chart tab: Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor
Click the Select Image button to open up the Images window, navigate to the gobos directory and search for the image required, select and open it then name it in the Name field.
Tip: Switch the window view to Thumbnails for image previews.
Channel
13
and
14:
Gobo
Rotation
Click the DMX button to open the Add DMX Channel dialog. Select Beam in
Class and Gobo Slot Rotation in Type. In the DMX channel section select 16 bit and assign the correct channel numbers. The Default value should be set to 127 as it is a midpoint default feature, the Hi Byte default value only need be set. Click
OK to create.
21 ‐ 60 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor DMX Chart tab:
The Gobo Wheel Slot 16 bit channels 13 and 14 have been created in the DMX
Chart window.
Channel
13
and
14:
Gobo
Rotation
(cont.)
Expand the Index Mode and Rotate ranges.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 21 ‐ 61
DMX Chart tab: Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor
Select the range to edit and adjust t
Chart window in the DMX range se
Ant-clockwise are reverse to the he values on the right hand side of the DMX ction. As this fixtures rotation Clockwise and
default values inserted the ranges need to be edited. Apply the change as seen bel ow to the Anti-clockwise range and click apply. Repeat this procedure for the values.
Clockwise range, inserting the correct
Anti-clockwise range values:
Clockwise range values:
As the default value for Stopped is already 127, this need not be adjusted. The
Index Mode values supplied by default are the same as the fixture specification, so, it too, requires no adjustment.
Channel
15:
Iris
Click the DMX button to open the Add DMX Channel dialog. Select Beam in
Class and Iris in Type. In the DMX channel section select Standard and assign the correct channel number. The Default value should be set to 255 as it is a 255 default value feature. Click OK to create.
21 ‐ 62 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor DMX Chart tab:
The Iris 8 bit channel 15 has been created in the DMX Chart window.
Channel
16,17
and
18:
Timing
channels
These three channels differ from the previous channels creat not map to generic controls. They will be Custom Feature ch associated with the Class of feature. ed in that they do annels that are
For the Focus Time channel 17 (Varilite terminology states Focus is Position) c lick the DMX button to open the Add DMX Channel dialog. Select Custom Position in Class, Custom Position will automatically be assigned to Type and as we are creating a Custom Feature a feature name needs to be assigned, type in Focus
Time. In the DMX channel section select Standard and assign the correct channel number. The Default value should be set to 0 as it is a 0 default value feature
Click OK to create.
.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 21 ‐ 63
DMX Chart tab: Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor
Repeat this process for the remaining channels 17 and 18. C
Class and Type set to Custom Colour and named Colour T hannel 17 will need ime, channel 18 will need Class and Type set to Custom Beam and named Beam Time.
Channel
19:
Control
The Control ch annel is also created as a Custom feature, The Class needs to be set as Custom Misc and Name to Con trol. This will create the channel, values for the control macros will be set in the DMX Macros tab.
21 ‐ 64 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor DMX Chart tab:
The Control 8 bit channel 19 has been created in the DMX Chart window.
Channel
19:
Control
(cont.)
To assign control macros, open the DMX Macros information using the specification from the manu tab and enter the relevant facturer.
Syntax: channel @ value wait milliseconds , next command.
Complex
macros
Some fixtures require more complex macros for for strike/reset/douse?. For example a fixture might require; ch1 to 255, ch4 to 17,ch 6 to 1, ch 8 to 0, ch 11 to 0 and ch 15 to 84 and for these channels to be held for 6 seconds, and sent back to default
In this case each command must state a wait time. The syntax is as follows:
[channel] @ [value] # [wait time in milliseconds]
So for the example above the macro would read as follows:
1@255#0;4@17#0;6@17#0;8@0#0;11@0#0;15@84#6000
That will send the specified values to all channels simultaneously and hold them for 6 seconds.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 21 ‐ 65
Channels with Custom Ranges Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor
Saving
the
Fixture:
O ag nce all channel ranges have been created, spend a few minutes che ainst the manufacturers specification. Click the OK button then cho cking them ose OK fr om the resulting Save Fixture And Exit dialog.
To use the fixture you will first need to exit the Fixture Library Editor, close the editor window and a confirmation dilaog will be presented. Click OK, the will regenerate the library catalogues to incorporate your new fixture. Ple patient as this ta
library ase be kes some time. Start Vista and the new fixture will be available for patching in th e User Fixture Library.
Channels
with
Custom
Ranges
While all the main features of fixtures are represented by generic controls on the console, the ranges that do not fit the generic model are controlled by Custom
Modes and Custom Ranges. A simple example of this is an Iris channel with pulse ranges.
Iris : Example ranges:
Iris closed to open: range: 0 – 128
Iris Pulse-1 slow to fast: 129 – 190
Iris Pulse-2 slow to fast: 191 - 255
Create the custom ranges as below:
The Iris Pulse controls will be found inside the Custom Iris widget in Vista :
21 ‐ 66 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 8 – The Fixture Editor Channels with Custom Ranges
Double click the widget to open the Custom Feature Browser, in order to access the custom Pulse range controls:
Vista User Guide, Version 2 21 ‐ 67
Retrieving Software Crash Files from a Console Appendix 9 – Crash Logs
22.
Appendix
9
–
Crash
Logs
Retrieving
Software
Crash
Files
from
a
Console
Al ough unusual software crashes can occur. If they do it is important that as much detail as possible is returned to Jands to enable the cause to be determined and eliminated. In order to simplify this process the console software includes a mea ns to package all of the necessary files for return to Jands support.
To
generate
a
crash
re port
package
on
a
L5,
T2,
T4
or
I3:
1.
Select File -> Quit Application from the main menu, which will open the
System Settings dialogue.
2.
If a crash has recently occurred t he dialogue will have an additional red button labeled “Export Crash Report”. Click “Export Crash Report”.
3.
Click “Select crash report files” .
4.
There should be at least one file available, but if there’s more select them all using SHIFT + Click or CTRL + Click.
5.
Click “Open”.
6.
If desired you can type some further information into the comment field to describe what was being done when the crash oc timeline selection dragging a h curred eg “I was in the andle when it crashed”.
7.
Click “Select removable device”.
8.
Select the USB device from the list.
9.
Click “Choose”. The files will be transferred to the USB device.
10.
When it’s finished click “OK”.
11.
Remove the USB memory stick and r eturn the files to Jands via the online support request page http://www.j
andsvista.com/support/supportrequest-form/
12.
Click “Vista 2” to restart the Vista ap plication.
22 ‐ 68 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 9 – Crash Logs Retrieving Software Crash Files from a Console
Retrieving
Software
Crash
Files
from
a
Windows
PC
Please follow the procedure below to configure a Windows PC controlling the
Jands Vista 2 application such that crash dump files may be collected and subsequently analysed in the event of a Vista crash. This procedure is for
Microsoft Windows operating systems onl y.
This procedure must be executed before any crash, as files generated without this application cannot be retrieved or analysed.
Note: Not all crashes will generate a log file. If you experience a crash and no log file is generated, please report all information you can to us.
The re are two different procedures – one for XP and another Microsoft Vista.
Set up
Procedure
for
Windows
XP:
1.
In the Start menu's Run box, enter the command "drwtsn32 -i"
2.
A dialog box will appear informing you that Dr. Watson has been installed as the default debugger. Press OK.
Retrieving
Crash
Files
on
Windows
XP:
1.
Crash information will be written in
Settings\All Users\App to the directory "C:\Documents and lication Data\Microsoft\Dr Watson. Should a Vista crash occur, navigate to th is directory.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 22 ‐ 69
Retrieving Software Crash Files from a Console Appendix 9 – Crash Logs
2.
Check the modification date of the “user.dmp” and “drwtsn32.txt” files to make sure that you are looking at the file that corresponds with when the crash occurred.
3.
Rename the "user.dmp" file to something a more descriptive eg Byron2-0-
6838_20101124_01.dmp".
4.
Send the renamed user.dmp file, an exported copy of the show file, drwtsn32.txt, and a description of what you were doing to [email protected], or use the support contact form at www.jandsvista.com/support.
Reconfiguring
drwtsn32
Settings:
Running drwtsn32 without any options or switches will bring up a window that allows various settings to be changed eg the location of the dump files can be made more easily accessible, or a visual alert letting you know a crash was logged.
If drwtsn32 is reconfigured, please ensure that the checkboxes and radio buttons remain set as shown in the following image .
22 ‐ 70 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 9 – Crash Logs Retrieving Software Crash Files from a Console
Additionally the number of crashes to save is limited to 10 by default. Once the limit has been reached, the system will no longer generate new log files. To en sure that data is collected users should periodically remove log files.
Proc edure
for
Windows
Vista:
Windo ws Error Reporting (WER) has been integrate d into the Microsoft Vista operating system. By default, Vista uploads the crash logs to Microsoft, but does not save a local copy. To save a local c reconfigured by following these steps: opy of the crash logs, the registry must be
1.
Download the file “ActivateCrashDumps.reg” file from the Jands Vista website http://www.jandsvista.com/ActivateCrashDumps.reg . Some browsers helpfully add a ".txt" to the filename (which may not be shown if
Windows is hiding file file extensions - see below for details on changing this behavior). The file must have the file extension ".reg".
2.
Save the file to the PC.
3.
Using Wi ndows Explorer, find the file and double-click on
ActivateCrashdumps.reg to run it.
4.
Respond affirmatively to any prompts.
5.
Reboot the PC.
The next time any applic a folder located inside ation crashes, the crash information will be written into
"%LOCALAPPDATA%\local\Microsoft\Windows\WER\Repor tQueue" (where
%LOCALAPPDATA% is usually "c:\Users\user\AppData"). Check the modification date of the directory to make sure that the appropriate directory is being displa yed.
Windows Vista hides many directories (a nd files) from the user by default. This can be changed in the Control Panel by selecting Folder Options -> View Tab ->
Hidden File s and Folders -> Show Hidden Files).
Vista User Guide, Version 2 22 ‐ 71
Retrieving Software Crash Files from a Console Appendix 9 – Crash Logs
Each crash will result in a new directory below "ReportQueue". Package up the entire directory naming each file something more descriptive eg
“Vista_1.13.522X_20090720_01.dmp" along with the show file and a brief explanation of what was being done, and email them to [email protected].
22 ‐ 72 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Using the touchpad
Appendix 10 – the touchpad and the pen tablet
23.
Appendix
10
–
the
touchpad
and
the
pen
tablet
Using
the
touchpad
Like all pointing devices, the touchpad may take a short time to get used to.
However you will soon find that using this device is natural and intuitive.
Simply glide your finger across the surface of the pad to move the cursor and tap you r finger to ‘click’. It's easy!
Click
To click, lightly and quic button once. kly tap the surface of the pad once. Or, press the left
To double-click, double t ap on the pad or click the left button twice.
Remember, the touchpad responds best to a very firm, crisp tap.
Right
Click
To right-click for submenus, tap the tap zone in the upper right corner of the touchpad or click the right button once.
Drag
To drag, dr aw, or highlight, double-tap rapidly and hold your finger down on the second tap, then glide to move. You may also hold the left button as you glide your finger.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 23 ‐ 73
Working with the grip pen Appendix 10 – the touchpad and the pen tablet
Glide
Extend
To drag further than the pad surface, lift and reposition your finger after reaching the textured edge. GlideExtend will virtually eliminate the edge of the pad while you drag. In other words, if you are dragging an item and you hit the textured edge, GlideExtend will hold the drag for three seconds while you reposition to complete the drag. To shut off GlideExtend earlier than three seconds, simply tap or click a button.
Scroll
To scroll, place your finger down the right edg e of the touchpad and glide up or down. This featu re r quires third party software on Macintosh systems (see
Macintosh advanced features se ction for USB version of Easy Cat).
Working
i
the
grip
pen
This information is kind ly provided by Wacom, th e pen tablet manufacturer.
As you work with the pen-tablet, you can rest your hand lightly on the display screen, just as if it were a drawing board or sheet of paper . Hold the Grip Pen as you would a pencil. Make sure the side switch is in a convenient location where you can press it with your thumb or forefinger, but won’t accidentally press it while drawing.
Â
The Grip Pen should never be stored in a container where it will rest on its tip or eraser. When the pen is not in use, place your pen in the pen holder or lay it flat on y our desk.
Tip
switch
/
Pen
Tip
The pen is activated as soon as it enters proximity, about 5 m m (0.2 in), above the
Interactive Pen Display screen. This allows you to position the screen cursor or use the DuoSwitch without touching the pen tip to the display screen.
Whe simu n pressure is applied to the pen tip, the tip switch is turned on and the lates a mouse button click.
pen
23 ‐ 74 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 10 – the touchpad and the pen tablet Using a pen
Eraser
To u se the eraser, hold the Gr ip Pen upside down. When the eraser is within proximity of the active area, the tablet reports the pen coordinates and the pressure applied to the eraser.
The eraser is not implemented in Version 1 of the Vista software.
DuoSwitch
The DuoSwitch can be used to perform the as the tip switch. Toggle the DuoSwitch in either direction to activate the up or lower button functions. same click and double-click functions per
Â
If you do not care to use the side switch, you can remove if by followi ng the directions in Removing and installing the Duo Switch .
Using
a
pen
Pointing
and
Selecting
Move the Grip Pen above the pen tablet display screen to position the screen cursor. The cursor jumps to the locati positioning). Press the pen tip on t on where you place the pen (absolute he display screen to make a selection.
Clicking
Tap the disp lay screen once with the pen tip, or touch the pen to the display screen with enough pressure to generate a mouse click.
Double
‐
Clicking
Press the upper side switch, or quickly tap the display screen twice in the same place with the pen tip. Double-clicking is easier w the tablet screen. hen the pen is perpendicular to
Dragging
Select an object, then slide the pen tip across the display scre en to move the object.
Erasing
Erasing is not currently supported in the Vista system.
Working
with
the
Pen
tablet
As you work with the pen tablet, you can rest your hand lightly on the display screen, just as if it were a drawing boar d or sheet of paper.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 23 ‐ 75
Using a pen Appendix 10 – the touchpad and the pen tablet
Because the drawing surface will be a little higher than a normal desk, consider adjusting the height of you desk or chair to assure comfortable use of the device .
When working with the pen tablet, maintain a good posture at all times and change your position if you feel any discomfort due to your work position or the weight of the tablet.
The Interactive Pen Display should be positioned so you can view it comfortably with a minimum of eyestrain.
Here are some other po ints to keep in mind:
• Take short breaks between tasks to stretch and relax your muscles.
• Use a gentle grip when working with the pen.
• Alternate tasks throughout the day.
• Minimize awkward postures and repetitive movemen ts that cause discomfort.
Working
with
On
Screen
Display
Settings
The pen tablet display is equipped with an On Screen Display function. The OSD function enables you to adjust and optimize a variety of display settings at the touch of a button. The OSD controls are located above the tablet on the T series consoles and in the armrest of the L series.
Sel ection
buttons
Use these buttons to select an option that can then be activated when you press the Enter button.
After activating a selected option, press the + button to increase a selected item value, and press the button to decrease it.
The basic process for working with the OSD is as follows:
1.
Press the Menu button to open the OSD main menu.
2.
Use the + or - buttons to select an option. When the option you want to adjust is highlighted, press the Enter button. The current settings and adjustment sub-menu for that option will appear.
3.
Use the + or - buttons to adjust the option settings.
23 ‐ 76 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 10 – the touchpad and the pen tablet Using a pen
4.
When you have made your changes, press the Enter button to save. To exit, press the Menu button.
Â
All settings are automatically saved when the O changes to the display appearance and cannot re
SD menu closes. If you make turn to the original settings, use the Reset Recall option to return The pen tabl et to its original factory defaults.
Caring
for
the
Cintiq
pen
tablet
Keep the Grip Pen and the Cintiq LCD screen su rface clean. Dust and dirt particles can stick to the pen and cause wear to th
Regular cleaning will help prolong the lif
Keep Cintiq and the Grip Pen in a cl temperature. e display screen surface. e of your LCD screen surface and pen. ean, dry place and avoid extremes in
Room temperature is best. Cintiq and the Grip Pe
(except where specifically indicated for removal
DuoSwitch). Taking apart the product will void n are not made to come apart and replacement of the pen’s your warranty.
Caution - If the pen tip becomes sharp or angular, it may da mage the coating on the display screen. Please replace the pen tip if necessary.
Cleaning
the
Pen
‐
Ta blet
To clean the Grip Pen , use a soft cloth and mild detergent (such as dishwashing liqu id) diluted with water. Do n ot use paint thinner, benzine, alcohol, or other solvents.
To c
Whe lean the display screen , use an anti-static cloth or a slightly damp cloth. n cleaning, apply only a fixture amount of pressure to the display screen and do n ot make the surface wet. Do not use detergent to clean the display screen; this may damage th e coating on the screen. Please note that damage of this kind is not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.
Replacing
the
Pen
Tip
The pen tip will wear with normal use. When the pen tip gets too short, you can replace it with one of the extra tips that came wit h the pen.
To
remove
the
old
tip:
Clasp it with a pair of tweezers, needle-nosed pliers, or similar instrument and pull the old tip straight out of the pen.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 23 ‐ 77
Removing and installing the Duo Switch Appendix 10 – the touchpad and the pen tablet
To
insert
a
new
tip:
Slide it straight into the barrel of the pen.
Firmly push the tip until it stops. The new tip will slide into the correct position.
If the pen tip wears and becomes an gular, it may damage the coating on the Pen tablet display screen. To avoid this, pe riodic tip replacement is recommended.
WARNING Prevent children from swallo pen tip or side switch may accidentally them. wing the pen tip or side switch.
The be pulled out if children are biting on
Removing
and
installing
the
Duo
Switch
S ome users prefer to remove the DuoSwitch when working with the Grip Pen.
For example, you may want to remove the switch in order to focus on a drawing and eliminate any accidental clicks that would occur if you unintentionally pressed on the switch. Note, however, that removing the DuoSwitch also removes the b utton functionality it offers. For most users it is unnecessary to remove the D uoSwitch.
Important: Do not remove the switch by prying it from either end as this may damage your Pen. NEVER adjust the tr immer capacitor that will be visible when the switch is removed. When using the pen without the DuoSwi replace the original rubberized grip with the optional grip in ord trimmer capacitor. tch, always er to protect the
To remove the DuoSwitch:
1.
Firmly clasp the uoSwitch in the middle and pull out. Press in on the rubberized g i
2.
en ip cone by turning it counterclockwise. Then pull the g forward over the pen tip. rip
3.
Install the op tional grip by aligning the pen case rails with the grooves insi de the grip and push ing the grip over the pen t ip. Then replace the pen tip cone by turning it clockwise onto the pen.
23 ‐ 78 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 10 – the touchpad and the pen tablet Removing and installing the Duo Switch
To Install the DuoSwitch:
1.
Remove the pen tip cone by turning it counterclockwise. Then pull the grip forward over the pen tip.
2.
Install the original grip (the one with the DuoSwitch access slot) by aligning the pen case rails with the grooves inside the grip and pushing the grip over the pen tip. When properly positioned, the DuoSwitch access hole will reveal the trimmer capacitor. Then install the pen tip cone by turning it clockwise onto the pen.
3.
Align the DuoSwitch into place, making sure to match the switch position to the grip molding. Then gently press in on the DuoSwitch until it snaps into place.
Vista User Guide, Version 2 23 ‐ 79
Precautions on using and handling the Pen ‐ Tablet Appendix 10 – the touchpad and the pen tablet
P recautions
o n
using
and
handling
th e
Pen
‐
Tablet
Temperature
and
Humidity
Operating temperature and humidity 5 ˚ to 35 ˚ C, 20 to 80% RH
Storage temperature and humidity -10 ˚ to 60 ˚ C, 20 to 90% RH
CAUTION. Do not use or store th e pen tablet where:
• Temperature changes are severe or exceed specifications
(e.g., outdoors or inside a vehicle).
• The pen tablet and the Grip Pen are exposed to direct sunlight or heat from an appliance.
• The pen tablet and the Grip Pen are exposed to water or any other kind of liquid.
CAUTION. Do not use The pen tablet in a dusty environment; this may damage the unit
Handling
WARNING: If the LCD screen has been damaged, DO NOT touch any liquid that may be leaking from it; this liquid is an irritant. In case of contact with skin, eyes, or mouth, rinse immediately with running water for at least 15 minutes or more. If contact is made with the eyes or mouth, also consult a physician.
WARNING : Prevent children from swallowing the pen tip or side switch.
The pen tip or side switch may accidentally be pulled out if children are biting on them.
23 ‐ 80 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 10 – the touchpad and the pen tablet Precautions on using and handling the Pen ‐ Tablet
CAUTION : Do not dis malfunction. In this cas the product. assemble the Grip Pen.
This may cause the device to e, Wacom shall have no responsibility to repair or replace
CAUTION: Do not scratch the display screen. Avoid placing sharp objects on the display screen surface.
CAUTIO
Pen.
N : Avoid intensive shock or vibration to the pen tablet or the Grip
Hitting or dropping the pen tablet display may damage the displa or other components. y screen
CAUTION: Do not put heavy articles on the Intera against it with a strong force; this may damage the d stand. ctive Pen Display or push isplay screen or bend the
CAUTION : If the pe n tip becomes sharp or angular, it may damage the coating on the display screen. Please replace the pen tip if necessary.
CAUTION : Do not use any organic solven t (e.g., alcohol) or even mild detergent to clean the display screen . Use of these cleaners can damage the coating on the screen. Please note that damage of this kind is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty .
T
W o clean the di splay sc hen cleaning, a pply reen, u se an anti-static cloth or a slight only a fixture amoun t of pre ssure to th ly damp c e displa loth. y screen and do not make the surface wet.
To clean the pen tablet casing or Grip Pen, use a
(such as dish washing liquid) diluted with wate
so r. ft cloth wi th mild detergent
Vista User Guide, Version 2 23 ‐ 81
Power Appendix 11 – technical details
24.
Appendix
11
–
technic al
details
Power
Power Requirements:
Power Consumption:
Power Connector:
T4 / T2 /
I3 / L5
E2 / S3 S1 M1
100VAC to 240VAC +/- 10%, 50-6 0 Hz
400 Watts 40 W 2 max
IEC 3-pin max atts 0 Watts max
USB powered
2.5
Watts max
USB
Service
&
Maintenance
With care Vista products will require little or no maintenance. However, the internal battery (in the T and I series only)will need to be replaced on a regular basis (see the following section).
If the front panel requires cleaning, wipe with a ild deterge cloth.
m nt on a damp soft
The CD drive mechanism battery (in the T4 / T2 console only) is mechanical and should always be treated with care. Never allow the entry of fluids into the slot.
DO NOT spray liquids onto the front panel.
DO NOT use solvents for cleani el.
Warning: Do not allow the entry of liquids of any sort into the console chassis.
The T4 / T2 CPU tray should be periodically cleaned to ensure dust does not build up near the fans.
Battery
replacement
The Vista T and I series s ystem BIOS sett ings. T consoles have an in he battery should la ternal battery that is used to maintain st approximately 5 years from the date the battery was made. If the console reports BIOS check errors, please return the console to an authorised agent for battery replacement.
24 ‐ 82 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 11 – technical details Installation
Installation
Vista consoles and control surfaces must be installed in a location that allows adequate ventilation around the rear of the product. There must be at least
1 50mm of free space around the rear and sides of the console when in use.
Failure to allow adeq console. uate ventilation may result in premature shutdown of the
An external UPS may be connected if mains blackouts are anticipated.
T4
/
T2
/
I3
/
L5
Shut
down
Always use the correct procedure to shut the console down. Select ‘Shutdown’ from the File menu.
General
Specifications
Inputs
&
Outputs
Description Type
DMX 512 (1-4) 5 pin Female AXR
Ethernet
(100BaseT)
SMPTE (Audio)
MIDI In
RJ-45
3 pin Female AXR
5 pin Female DIN
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
Pin Function
1
2
3
4
5
Shield
Data –
Data +
Data – (DMX 4 only)
Data + (DMX 4 only)
Transmit +
Transmit –
Receive +
Unused
Unused
Receive –
Unused
Unused
Shield
LTC –
LTC +
NC
Shield
NC
RX+
RXD
Vista User Guide, Version 2 24 ‐ 83
General Specifications Appendix 11 – technical details
Description Type
MIDI Thru/Out
COM (RS232)
Trigger In
Trigger Out
Video 1
Video 2
5 pin Female DIN
9 pin D
6.5mm Jack Socket
6.5mm Jack Socket
15 pin High Density D
Pin Function
1
2
3
4
5
NC
Shield
NC
TX+
TXD
4
5
6
1
2
3
7
8
9
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Tip
Sleeve
Tip
Sleeve
DCD
RXD
TXD
DTR
Gnd
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
Trigger In
Ground
Trigger Out
Ground
Red
Green
Blue
NC
Ground
Red Ground
Green Ground
Blue Ground
Vcc
Sync Ground
NC
VD Data
Horizontal sync
Vertical sync
VD Clock
Audio Mic
Audio Out
Audio Line In
3.5mm Jack socket
3.5mm Jack socket
3.5mm Jack socket
2
3
4
Tip
Sleeve
Tip
Ring
Sleeve
Tip
Ring
Sleeve
Data –
Data +
Ground
Signal
Shield
Left
Right
Shield
Left
Right
Shield
24 ‐ 84 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Appendix 11 – technical details General Specifications
Description Type
D esk Lamp 1
D esk Lamp 2
Pin
2
3
Function
Lamp –
12V
Vista User Guide, Version 2 24 ‐ 85
General Specifications
Index
25.
Index
A add cue, 6-1 5 adding events to th e timeline, 6-41 adjust timing, 6-44
Advanced Prop erties , 4-8 al ias cues, 6-17 alias cues , 6-23 al igning start and end points, 6-45 al l events view filtering, 6-36
All panel, 5-2 2
A lt, 3-4 applying s aved timing, 6-33 apply ing extracts, 5-52, 6-48 ar ranging the q uickpicker, 5-43 arranging the qu ickpickers, 5-40
ArtNet
Broadcast Mode, 4-17 compatible devices, 4-16 audio adju sting cues to, 8-3
A udio, 8-1 audio playback, 6-28
B backup, 17-27 ba ckups exporting shows (backing up), 2-5 ba ttery, 24-85 be am, 5-26 setting, 5-2 6, 5-34 blocking, 6-23 include all trac ked events in a cue,
6-18 bootable USB device, 16-24 bu ilt in effect
Vista User Guide, Version 2 applying, 5-51 buttons configuring, 3-9 buttons , 3-2
Shift, Alt, Ctrl, 3-4
C calibrating the pen, 13-2 ch anging a cue, 6-18 universes, 4-5
C hannels, 4-1 0 chase properties, 6-29 checking that your fixtures ar e working, 5-21
Chooser menu, 14-14 chooser w indow, 5-1 matrix, 5-12 sort order, 5-18 cli, 5-53 cl oning fixtures, 4-12
CM Y, 5-23 colo ur setting in detail, 5-29 colour setting, 5-23 colour wheel, 5-24, 5-31
C ommand Line In terface, 5-53 co mmands within cuelists, 6-49 co mponents assigning to control s, 11-14
Components tab, 5-38 configurations saving, 6-32 co nfiguring the sidebar, 3-9 configuring buttons, 3-9 connecting to the c onsole via FTP,
15-22 co nsole
25 ‐ 1
General Specifications
I3, 11-2
M1, 11-3
S1, 11-2
S3 , 11-2
T2, 11-2 co nsole layout, 11-1 setting up, 2-1
T4, 11-1 co nsole modifier keys, 11-4 co ns ole configuring th e console, 11-12 co nsole configuring the console, 11-13 console pages, 11-23 co nsole snapshots, 11-23 console control panel, 13-1 console hardware, 11-1
Co nsole menu, 14-13 co nsole settings, 13-1 control pane l console se ttings, 13-1 controls effects, 7-4 cr ash logs, 22-70 creating a show, 2-4 ex g tracts, 5-52, 6-48 roups, 5-46 pre sets, 5-47 release events, 6-47
Ctrl, 3-4 cue adding and deletin g, 6-15 block, 6-18 chang ing single cues, 6-18 merge, 6-16 move or copy, 6-16 properties, 6-21 cue properties, 6-21 cuelist adding audio, 8-1 audio, 6-28 block step, 6-18 chase s, 6-29
25 ‐ 2
Index date & time contr default prope editing, 6-10 rties, 6-29 midi control, 1 ol, 9-6
9-36 moving arou moving even nd in, 6-11 ts around, 6-43 navigator, 6-12 notes, 6-29 opening in the edito playback con playback rate, 628 r, 6-10 trol window, 10-10 playing, 6-11 progress indicato propert ies, 6-26, r, 6-41
11-20 release timing , 6-28 selection handles, 6-43 serial control, 20-40 timecode, 6 -28 timeline, 6-34 timeline and , 6-6, 6-10 updating during pla yback, 6-51 using command using timecode, view as layout, 6 view as s within, 6-49
9-5
-15
table, 6-14 v iew cue list, 6-13 cue list defaults, 6-29 cuelist notes, 6-29
C uelist pane, 10-11 cue list tabs, 6-11 cue lists, 6-1 cues adding audio, 8-1 alias, 6-1 b
7, 6-23 locking, 6-23 cue la yout view, 6-15 cue list view, 6-13 cue table view, 6-14 cu stom gobo, 5-33 setting custom focus & frame values, 5-35 setting custom va lues, 5-32 custom values about, 5-36 cu stomising control pan el, 13-1
Vista User Guide, Version 2
Index
D
D ate & Time, 9-6 date an d time, 136
D BO, 11-3 default times, 6-30 delete cue, 6-15 deleting fixtures, 4-6 shows, 2-6 desk lights, 2-1 de tailed panels, 5-27 disconnecting an interface box , 4-16 di splays se tting up, 13-3
DMXinterface configuring, 4-15 do using a fixture, 3-11, 4-12 duplicating layout views, 5-7
E ed it cuelist, 6-10
Ed it menu, 14-8 ed iting in the Playback c ontrol window,
10-15 ed itor status bar, 6-40 ef fect applying, 5-5 1 effects, 5-51, 7-12, 7-13 apply controllin g, 7-4 ing template effects, 5-51, 7-1 list of, 7-3 modifying template effe cts, 7-3 rate control, 7-4 reviewing, 7-2 saving, 7-13 stopping, 6-47 types, 7-1 using, 7-1 ef fects window advanced tab, 7-10 feature ta sequen b, 7-5 ce tab, 7-8
Vista User Guide, Version 2
General Specifications
Ethernet-DMX interface changing settings of, 5-2 co nfiguring, 4-15 conne cting, 4-16 disconnecting, 4-16 setting the port, 4-16 event bars, 6-34 about, 6-42 ev ents aligning start and end points, 6-45 changed, 6-42 fade curve, 6-45 m uting, 6-47 release, 6 -47 release events, 6 -47 reset to defau lt time, 6-45 selection handles, 643 snap, 6-42 un-tracking, 6-47 expanding playbacks, 11 -15 exp orting shows, 2-5 external displays, 2-1 extracts applying ex tracts, 5-52, 6-48 creating and applying extracts, 6-
48 creating extracts, 5-52, 6-48
F fade curve, setting, 6-45 feature summarise by, 6-35 filters choosing, 6-36 creating custom filters, 6-36 managing saved, 6-38 one click, 6-39 fine mode, 5-23, 11-7
Fixture, 4-7
Fi xture editor, 21-43
Fi xture files editing, 21-43
Fixture Id, 4-8
Fi xture Name, 4 -7 fixture sor t order, 5-18
Fi xture Type, 4-7 fixtu res adding to groups, 5-45
25 ‐ 3
General Specifications adding to the patch panel, 4-2 arranging fixtures in a layout, 5-2 checking that your fixtures are working, 5-21 choosin g, 4-2 cloning, 4-12 controlling, 4-11 deleting, 4-6 dousing, 3-11, 4-12
Fixtures screen, 5-1 hiding and ‘unhiding’ fixtu res, 5-
4, 5-5 import patch from CS V, 4-13 patching, 4-1 pro perties, 4-7 rearranging on the patch panel , 4-
5 renaming, 4-6 renumbering, 4-6 resetting, 3-11, 4-12 selecting, 5-13, 12-3 sort ord er, 5-14 sorting, 5-13 striking, 3-11, 4-11 summarise by, 6-36 focus, 5-26 fr ost, 5-26
FT P, 15-22 connecting via, 15-22 function keys assigning, 11-3
G gels manufacture r, 5-24, 5-31 generic f ixture model, 2-2 go bo setting , 5-25, 5-32
G rand Master, 113 groups adding fixtures to, 5-45 creating, 5-46
H hardware programmer controls, 5-55
Help menu, 14-18 hiding
25 ‐ 4
Index fixtures, 5 -4, 5-5 hi ghlight, 5-21 preset, 5-49
H SV, 5-23, 5-30 hu e, 5-23, 5-30
I importing shows, 2-5 in put devices setting up, 13-3 inputs & outputs, 24-85 inst allation, 24-85 inten sity setting, 5-22 setting in detail, 5-27 interface, 3-1
Invert pan, 4-8
Invert tilt, 4-8
IP Address, 13 -4, 13-5
IP Gateway, 13 -6
IP Ne t mask, 13-5 ir is, 5-26
J jump using the keyboard, 11-10
K key pad in the programmer, 5-53
L layout adding notes, 5-10 arranging fix tures in, 5-2 different views, 5-3 la yout view activating, 5-7 arranging, 5-7 duplicating, 5-7 layout win dow adding notes to, 5-1 0 arranging fixtures, 5-1 1 grid, 5-11 layouts managing views, 5 -3
Vista User Guide, Version 2
Index options, 5-6 organising, 5-7 properties, 5-5
LCDs screensaver, 13-4
Learn Timing, 8-2
Le e swatchbo ok, 5-24
Li mit, 4-8 list view, 4-10, 4-11
Live Time Wind ow, 5-49 loading existing show s, 2-4 lo gs, 22-70 lowlight, 5 pres
-21 et, 5-49
M m anufacturer gels, 5-24, 5-31 m atrix placing fixtures, 5-12 m enu
Chooser menu,
Console menu,
14-14
14-13
Edit menu, 14-8
Help menu, 14-18
Patc h menu, 14-12
Session menu, 14-7
Step menu, 14-9
Timeline menu, 14-15
Tools menu, 14-10
View menu, 14-16 m enu bar, 3-1 menu reference, 147 merge cue, 6-16 midi control, 19-36 midi show control, 19 -37 m odifier keys, 11-4 monitoring active cue lists, 10-10 move or copy cues, 6-1 6 moving events arou nd, 6-43 fixtures arou nd the patch panel, 4-
5 msc, 19-37 muting
Vista User Guide, Version 2
General Specifications events, 6-47
N na m es renaming fixtures, 4-6 navigating, 3 -1 network prefer ences, 13-5 no tes adding to the layout w indow, 5-10
O
O ffset, 4-9 output view tabs adding, 12-1 output window, 12configuring, 12-2
1 ou tputs & inputs, 24-85
P
Page controls, 11-13 pag es, 11-23 palettes common featu res of the palettes,
5-20 summary & d etailed views, 5-19 tabs, 5-19 pa rameters fine mode, 5-23, 11-7
Park, 4-12, 14-13 password-protecting sho ws, 2-7 pa ste options, 6-17 patch importing a CSV file t o, 4-13 viewing in different wa ys, 4-10
Pa tch menu, 14-12 pa tch panel adding the fixtu panel, 4-2 re t o the patch moving fixtures around, 4-5 rearranging fixtures o n, 4-5 pa tch window toolbar, 3-10 patching adding fixtures to the patch panel,
4-2 addin g fixtures to the rig, 4-1
25 ‐ 5
General Specifications complete fixture list, 4-2 pa tching your rig, 4-1 pe n, 23-75 calibra ting, 13-2 pl ayback assigning componen ts to controls,
11-14 popup menu, 11-19 status indica tion, 11-18 pl ayback buttons assigning functions, 11-16 group mas ters, 11-20
Playback Control Window, 9-5, 10-
10
Playback rate %, 6-25, 6-28, 6-29 playba cks expanding, 11-15 standard and split mo des, 11-15 with faders, 11-1 2 without faders, 11-13 pos ition setting, 5-22 setting in detail, 5-28 po wer, 2-1, 2-2, 2 4-84 preferences general, 13-1 network, 13-5
Preheat, 4-8 p r esets availability, 5-45 presets labels, 5-45 presets about, 5-47 presets creating, 5-47 presets updating, 5-49 presets highlight and lowlight, 5-49 presets, updating, 6-51
Priority, 6-25, 6-26, 6-29, 19-38 prism, 5-26 programmer hardware controls, 5-55 programmer, using the keypad, 5-53 progress indicator, 6-41 properties
25 ‐ 6
Index cue, 6-21 cuelist, 6-26 fixtures, 4-7 la youts, 5-5 setting cuelist properties, 11-20
Q qu ickpicker arranging, 5-40, 5 multi, 5 -41
-43 popup menu, 5-42
R ra w setting ra w intensity and position values, 5-27, 5-28 rem ote control, 18-33 renaming fixtures, 4-6 renumbering fixtures, 4-6 rest fi xtures, 3-11, 4-12 reviewing e ffects, 7-2
RGB, 5-23 right-click using the LR button, 11-4 rotation, 5-25, 5-32
S saturation, 5-23, 5-30 save filters, 6-38 saving copies of shows, 2-5 effects, 7-13 password-protecting, 2-7 shows, 2-4 timing configurations, 6-32 screensaver, 13-4 selecting fixtures, 5-13 selection display order, 5-14 selection handles, 6-43 selection order, 5-14 selection tools, 5-13 serial control, 20-40
Vista User Guide, Version 2
Index service & maintenance, 24-84
Session menu, 14-7 set timing window, using, 6-44 setting beam, 5-26 colour, 5-23 gobo, 5-25 position, 5-22 setting cuelist properties, 11-20 setting up, 2-1 settings console, 13-1 control panel, 13-1
Shift, 3-4 show creating a show, 2-4 deleting, 2-6 exporting shows (backing up), 2-5 importing shows, 2-5 loading existing shows, 2-4 password-protecting, 2-7 saving, 2-4 saving copies of, 2-5 shutdown, 24-85 sidebar, 3-9, 5-18 components tab, 5-38 configuring, 3-9 slider intensity values, 5-22 setting intensity values in detail,
5-27 smartfx event mode, 6-24, 6-25
SmartFX, 5-51, 7-1 snapshots, 11-23 soft buttons, 3-2 software updates, 15-19, 16-24 sorting fixtures, 5-13, 5-14 specifications, 24-85 split modes, 11-15 standard mode, 11-15 status editor, 6-40
Step menu, 14-9
Step pane, 10-12 stopping
Vista User Guide, Version 2
General Specifications effects, 6-47 store selecting a cue and store options,
6-8 selecting a cuelist, 6-7 store all, 6-2 store part, 6-6 storing modulating effects, 5-52 swinging effects, 5-52 striking a fixture, 3-11, 4-11 summary by feature, 6-35 by fixture type, 6-36 summary views, 6-35
Swap pan/tilt, 4-8 swing making an effect swing, 7-13 swing effects, 7-7 switching on, 2-2
Symmetrical, 4-9
T table view, 4-10 technical information, 24-84 template effect applying, 7-1 modifying, 7-3 the multi quickpicker, 5-41 time and date, 13-6 timecode, 6-22, 6-28, 9-5 adjusting cues to, 8-3 timeline about, 6-6, 6-10, 6-34 adding events to, 6-41 aligning start and end points, 6-45 cuelist tabs, 6-11 default times, 6-30 event bars, 6-34 fade curve, 6-45 moving events around, 6-43 reset event time, 6-45 zooming in and out, 5-2, 21-52, 21-
56, 21-57, 21-58
Timeline menu, 14-15 timeline window, 6-10 timing
25 ‐ 7
General Specifications applying, 6-33 making precise adjustments, 6-44 using the set timing window, 6-44
Timing
Learn, 8-2 timing configurations saving, 6-32 toolbar reference, 14-7 toolbars, 3-10 chooser and timeline windows, 3-
11 main, 3-1 patch window, 3-10
Tools menu, 14-10 touchpad, 23-75 track untracking events, 6-47 tracking backup, 17-27 transformers, 4-8
U universes changing, 4-5 update software, 15-19, 16-24 updating presets, 5-49, 6-51
USB booting from, 16-24
Index
USB interfaces, 4-16 using effects, 7-1
V view summary, 6-35 the rig, 4-10 using different views, 5-3
View menu, 14-16 viewing patch in different ways, 4-10 views list view, 4-10, 4-11 table view, 4-10 vnc, 18-33
W window basics, 3-1 windows chooser, 5-1 navigating, 3-1
Z zoom, 5-26 zoom in and out, 6-39 zooming in and out, 5-2, 21-52, 21-
56, 21-57, 21-58
25 ‐ 8 Vista User Guide, Version 2
Advertisement
